Samsung Galaxy S 4G T-Mobile User manual

P O R T A B L E
M O B I L E
Q U A D - B A N D
P H O N E
User Manual
Please read this manual before operating your
phone, and keep it for future reference.
Intellectual Property
All Intellectual Property, as defined below, owned by or which is otherwise the property of Samsung or its respective suppliers relating to
the SAMSUNG Phone, including but not limited to, accessories, parts, or software relating there to (the “Phone System”), is proprietary to
Samsung and protected under federal laws, state laws, and international treaty provisions. Intellectual Property includes, but is not limited
to, inventions (patentable or unpatentable), patents, trade secrets, copyrights, software, computer programs, and related documentation
and other works of authorship. You may not infringe or otherwise violate the rights secured by the Intellectual Property. Moreover, you
agree that you will not (and will not attempt to) modify, prepare derivative works of, reverse engineer, decompile, disassemble, or
otherwise attempt to create source code from the software. No title to or ownership in the Intellectual Property is transferred to you. All
applicable rights of the Intellectual Property shall remain with SAMSUNG and its suppliers.
Samsung Telecommunications America (STA), LLC
Headquarters:
Customer Care Center:
1301 E. Lookout Drive
1000 Klein Rd.
Richardson, TX 75082
Plano, TX 75074
Toll Free Tel:
1.888.987.HELP (4357)
Internet Address: http://www.samsung.com
©2011 Samsung Telecommunications America, LLC. Samsung is a registered
trademark of Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd.
T959V_Galaxy_S_4G_UG_UVKJ6_PS_112111_F11
Do you have questions about your Samsung Mobile Phone?
For 24 hour information and assistance, we offer a new FAQ/ARS System (Automated Response System) at:
www.samsung.com/us/support
Nuance®, VSuite™, T9® Text Input, and the Nuance logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Nuance Communications, Inc., or its
affiliates in the United States and/or other countries.
ACCESS® and NetFront™ are trademarks or registered trademarks of ACCESS Co., Ltd. in Japan and other countries.
The Bluetooth® word mark, figure mark (stylized “B Design”), and combination mark (Bluetooth word mark and “B Design”) are registered
trademarks and are wholly owned by the Bluetooth SIG.
microSD™ and the microSD logo are Trademarks of the SD Card Association.
Openwave® is a registered Trademark of Openwave, Inc.
Google, the Google logo, Android, the Android logo, Android Market, Gmail, Google Mail, Google Maps, Google Talk, Picasa, and YouTube
are trademarks of Google Inc.
Wi-Fi is a registered trademark of the Wireless Fidelity Alliance, Inc.
Swype and the Swype logos are trademarks of Swype, Inc. © 2010 Swype, Inc. All rights reserved.
Open Source Software
Some software components of this product incorporate source code covered under GNU General Public License (GPL), GNU Lesser General
Public License (LGPL), OpenSSL License, BSD License and other open source licenses. To obtain the source code covered under the open
source licenses, please visit:
http://opensource.samsung.com.
Dynamic Noise Suppression from Audience
Your phone is equipped with an advanced voice processing chip that delivers clear mobile calls by suppressing background noise,
intermittent sounds (like a siren or nearby conversation), and echoes, allowing you to hear and be heard nearly anywhere.
How Does It Work?
Based on the intelligence of the human hearing system, the technology:
• Captures, evaluates and distinguishes all the sound signals surrounding your phone, and the person you're speaking with.
• Then isolates the primary voice in conversation and filters out the background noise - so the person you're calling hears only your voice, without
disturbing background noise.
• Dynamically equalizes and adjusts voice volume to optimize your calling experience, so you can hear clearly and don't need to speak louder to overcome
surrounding noise.
The noise suppression technology is built-in and already enabled in your new mobile phone. So it's ready to provide unsurpassed voice
clarity with every call.
Disclaimer of Warranties; Exclusion of Liability,
EXCEPT AS SET FORTH IN THE EXPRESS WARRANTY CONTAINED ON THE WARRANTY PAGE ENCLOSED WITH THE PRODUCT, THE
PURCHASER TAKES THE PRODUCT "AS IS", AND SAMSUNG MAKES NO EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WHATSOEVER
WITH RESPECT TO THE PRODUCT, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE MERCHANTABILITY OF THE PRODUCT OR ITS FITNESS FOR ANY
PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR USE; THE DESIGN, CONDITION OR QUALITY OF THE PRODUCT; THE PERFORMANCE OF THE PRODUCT; THE
WORKMANSHIP OF THE PRODUCT OR THE COMPONENTS CONTAINED THEREIN; OR COMPLIANCE OF THE PRODUCT WITH THE
REQUIREMENTS OF ANY LAW, RULE, SPECIFICATION OR CONTRACT PERTAINING THERETO. NOTHING CONTAINED IN THE INSTRUCTION
MANUAL SHALL BE CONSTRUED TO CREATE AN EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WHATSOEVER WITH RESPECT TO THE
PRODUCT. IN ADDITION, SAMSUNG SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES OF ANY KIND RESULTING FROM THE PURCHASE OR USE OF
THE PRODUCT OR ARISING FROM THE BREACH OF THE EXPRESS WARRANTY, INCLUDING INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES, OR LOSS OF ANTICIPATED PROFITS OR BENEFITS.
SAMSUNG IS NOT LIABLE FOR PERFORMANCE ISSUES OR INCOMPATIBILITIES CAUSED BY YOUR EDITING OF REGISTRY SETTINGS, OR
YOUR MODIFICATION OF OPERATING SYSTEM SOFTWARE.
USING CUSTOM OPERATING SYSTEM SOFTWARE MAY CAUSE YOUR DEVICE AND APPLICATIONS TO WORK IMPROPERLY.
Table of Contents
Section 1: Getting Started ..............................................6
Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Understanding this User Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Battery Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Extending Your Battery Life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Power Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Switching the Phone On or Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Locking and Unlocking the Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Creating a New Google Account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Signing into Your Google Account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Retrieving your Google Account Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Voice Mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Visual Voicemail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Task Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Section 3: Memory Card .............................................. 49
Section 2: Understanding Your Phone .........................19
Features of Your Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Back View of Your Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Phone Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Status Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Function Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Home Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Screen Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Menu Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
1
Using the SD Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
SD card Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Section 4: Call Functions and Contacts List ............... 52
Displaying Your Phone Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Making a Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Ending a Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Dialing Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Answering a Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Prefix Dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Using the Voice Dialer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Speed Dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Wi-Fi Calling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
In Call Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Call Logs Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Section 5: Entering Text ............................................... 70
Text Input Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Selecting the Text Input Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Using the Swype Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Using the Samsung QWERTY Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Using XT9 Predictive Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Section 6: Contacts ...................................................... 81
Accounts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contacts List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Finding a Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contact List Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contact Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contact Entry Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Joining Contact Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sending a Namecard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Copying Contact Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Synchronizing Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Get Friends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
My Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Additional Contact Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The History Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Updates Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
81
82
84
86
87
88
88
90
91
92
93
93
94
95
96
97
97
Section 7: Messages .................................................... 98
Types of Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Creating and Sending Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Message Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Viewing Newly Received Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Deleting Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Message Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Messaging Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Text Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Email . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Microsoft Exchange Email (Outlook) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Google Mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Google Talk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
104
107
110
111
Section 8: Multimedia ................................................ 112
Using the Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Camera and Camcorder Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Camcorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Amazon MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Gallery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Video Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INCEPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Media Hub . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Music Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Playlists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating a Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transferring Music Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing Music Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
T-Mobile TV HD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
YouTube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
112
113
120
121
121
122
123
123
123
125
127
127
128
128
128
129
Section 9: Applications and Development ................ 130
Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accounts and sync . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Add to Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alarm & Clocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AllShare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
130
130
130
130
131
2
Amazon Kindle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Amazon MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Books . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Calendar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Call logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Camcorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Car Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Desk Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Downloads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
DriveSmart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Email . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Facebook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Gallery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Google Mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Google Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
INCEPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Latitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Layar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Market . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Downloading a New Google Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Launching an Installed Google Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Android Development . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
3
Media Hub . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Memo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Messaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Mini Diary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Music Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
My Account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
My Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
News and Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Places . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Slacker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Swype tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
T-Mobile TV HD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Talk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Task Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
TeleNav GPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
ThinkFree Office . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Video Chat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Videos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Visual Voicemail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Voice Dialer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Voice Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Voice Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Wi-Fi Calling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Write and Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
YouTube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Section 10: Connections ............................................ 159
Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Enable Downloading for Web Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PC Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wi-Fi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tethering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mobile AP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
159
164
168
168
171
173
174
Accounts and Synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Privacy Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SD Card & Phone Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Search Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Language & Keyboard Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Voice Input and Output Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessibility Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Date and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Software Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
201
203
204
204
205
208
209
209
210
Section 11: Time Management .................................. 176
Section 13: Health and Safety Information ............... 211
Calendar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alarm and Clocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
World Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stopwatch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting a Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exposure to Radio Frequency (RF) Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) Certification Information . . .
FCC Part 15 Information to User: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Smart Practices While Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Battery Use and Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Samsung Mobile Products and Recycling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
UL Certified Travel Charger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display / Touch-Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GPS & AGPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Emergency Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Care and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Responsible Listening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operating Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FCC Hearing Aid Compatibility (HAC) Regulations for
Wireless Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Restricting Children's Access to Your Mobile Device . . . . . .
176
177
178
178
179
Section 12: Changing Your Settings .......................... 180
Wireless and Networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Call Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Drive Smart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sound Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Location and Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Screen Unlock Pattern Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Android Development . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
USB Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
180
187
190
190
192
194
195
198
200
201
211
215
217
217
218
220
221
221
222
223
223
224
226
228
229
4
FCC Notice and Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Other Important Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Section 14: Warranty Information ............................. 232
Standard Limited Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
End User License Agreement for Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Index ............................................................................ 241
5
Section 1: Getting Started
This section explains how to get started with your phone by
installing and charging the battery, installing the SIM card and
optional memory card, and setting up your voice mail.
Before using your phone for the first time, you’ll need to install
and charge the battery and install the SIM card. The SIM card is
loaded with your subscription details, such as your PIN, available
optional services, and many other features. If desired, you can
also install an SD card to store media for use with your phone.
Understanding this User Manual
The sections of this manual generally follow the features of your
phone. A robust index for features begins on page 241.
Also included is important safety information that you should
know before using your phone. This information is available near
the back of the guide, beginning on page 211.
This manual provides navigation instructions according to the
default display settings. If you select other settings, navigation
may be different.
Unless otherwise specified, all instructions in this manual
assume you are starting from the Home screen and using the
available keys.
Note: Instructions in this manual are based on default settings, and may vary
from your phone, depending on the software version on your phone,
and any changes to the phone’s Settings.
Unless stated otherwise, instructions in this User Manual start with the
phone unlocked, at the Home screen.
All screen images in this manual are simulated. Actual displays may
vary, depending on the software version of your phone and any
changes to the phone’s Settings.
Special Text
Throughout this manual, you’ll find text that is set apart from the
rest. These are intended to point out important information, share
quick methods for activating features, to define terms, and more.
The definitions for these methods are as follows:
• Notes: Presents alternative options for the current feature, menu, or
sub-menu.
• Tips: Provides quick or innovative methods, or useful shortcuts.
• Important: Points out important information about the current feature
that could affect performance.
• Warning: Brings to your attention important information to prevent
loss of data or functionality, or even prevent damage to your phone.
Getting Started
6
Text Conventions
This manual provides condensed information about how to use
your phone. To make this possible, the following text conventions
are used to represent often-used steps:
➔
Arrows are used to represent the sequence of
selecting successive options in longer, or
repetitive, procedures.
Example: “From the Home screen, press
(Menu) ➔ Settings ➔ Wireless
and network ➔ Bluetooth settings.”
Battery Cover
The battery, SIM card and SD card are installed under the
battery cover.
Important!: Before removing or replacing the battery cover, make sure
the phone is switched off. To turn the phone off, hold down
the
key until the power-off image displays, then tap
Power off.
7
To remove the battery cover:
1.
Hold the device firmly and locate the cover release latch.
2.
Place your fingernail in the opening and firmly “pop” the
cover off the device (similar to a soda can).
Release Latch
To replace the battery cover:
䊳
2.
Carefully slide the SIM card into the SIM card socket until
Position the battery cover over the battery compartment
the card clicks into place. Make sure that the card’s gold
and press down until you hear a click.
contacts face into the phone and that the upper-left angled
SIM Card Overview
corner of the card is positioned as shown.
Important!: Before removing or replacing the battery cover, make sure
the phone is switched off. To turn the phone off, hold down
the
key until the power-off image displays, then tap
Power off.
The SIM card is loaded with your subscription details such as
your telephone number, PIN, available optional services, and
many other features.
Install the SIM Card
Important!: The SIM card and its information can be easily damaged by
scratching or bending, so be careful when handling, inserting, or
removing the card. Keep all SIM cards out of reach of small
children.
Installing and Removing the SIM card
To install the SIM card:
1.
Confirm the battery is not currently installed within the
battery compartment. The battery can block the proper
Remove the SIM Card
installation of the SIM card into the slot.
Getting Started
8
To remove the SIM card:
1.
2.
3.
Firmly press the card into the slot and make sure that it
If installed, remove the battery from its compartment
catches with the push-click insertion. For more information
(1 and 2). The battery can block the proper removal of the
on how to use the SD card see “Using the SD Card” on
SIM card from the slot.
page 49.
Carefully slide the SIM card out of the SIM card socket.
Important!: Be sure to align the gold contact pins on the card with the
phone’s contacts.
Note: If the card is not inserted correctly, the phone will not detect it and nor
service will be available. If this happens, turn off the phone, remove
the card, and reinstall the card in the correct orientation.
Installing the microSD Memory Card
Your phone supports an optional (external) microSD™ or
microSDHC™ memory card for storage of media such as music,
pictures, video and other files. The SD card is designed for use
with this mobile phone and other devices.
Note: microSD memory cards include capacities of up to 2GB.
The microSDHC™ memory card types can range from 4GB to up
to 32GB.
Note: This device supports up to a 32GB microSDHC memory card.
9
1.
Remove the battery cover.
2.
Orient the card with the gold strips facing down.
Removing the microSD Memory Card
1.
Remove the battery cover.
2.
Firmly press the card into the slot and release it. The card
Installing Battery
should pop partially out of the slot.
3.
Remove the card from the slot.
Battery
Before using your phone for the first time, install the battery and
charge it fully.
Important!: Before removing or replacing the battery cover, make sure
the phone is switched off. To turn the phone off, hold down
the
key until the power-off image displays, then tap
Power off.
Installing the Battery
1.
Removing Battery
Slide the battery into the compartment (1) so that the tabs
on the end align with the slots at the bottom of the phone,
making sure the connectors align.
2.
Gently press down to secure the battery (2).
Removing the Battery
䊳
Grip the battery at the top end (3) and lift it up and out of
the battery compartment (4).
Getting Started
10
Charging the Battery
Your phone is powered by a rechargeable Li-ion battery. A wall
charger, which is used for charging the battery, is included with
your phone. Use only approved batteries and chargers. Ask your
local Samsung dealer for further details.
Before using your phone for the first time, you must fully charge
the battery. A discharged battery recharges fully in approximately
4 hours.
Charging Head
Note: Verify that the battery is installed prior to connecting the wall charger.
If the battery is not installed and the wall charger is connected, the
handset power cycles continuously preventing proper operation.
Failure to unplug the wall charger before you remove the battery, can
cause the phone to become damaged.
Important!: Although the battery comes partially charged. It is recommended
you fully charge the battery before using your device for the first
time.
1.
Connect the USB cable to the charging head.
2.
Slide open the Charger/Accessory jack cover (1).
3.
Insert the USB cable into the device’s Charger/Accessory
jack (2).
4.
Plug the charging head into a standard AC power outlet.
The device turns on with the screen locked and indicates
both its charge state and percent of charge.
Incorrect
USB Cable
Correct
11
Warning!: While the device is charging, if the touch screen does not function
due to an unstable power supply unplug the USB power adapter
from the power outlet or unplug the USB cable from the device.
Important!: If your handset has a touch screen display, please note that a
touch screen responds best to a light touch from the pad of your
finger or a non-metallic stylus. Using excessive force or a
metallic object when pressing on the touch screen may damage
the tempered glass surface and void the warranty. For more
information, refer to “Standard Limited Warranty” on page 232.
Low Battery Indicator
Incorrect
Correct
When the battery level is low and only a few minutes of talk time
remain, a warning tone sounds and the “Low battery” message
repeats at regular intervals on the display. In this condition, your
phone conserves its remaining battery power, by dimming the
backlight.
When the battery level becomes too low, the phone automatically
turns off.
Note: This illustration displays both the correct and incorrect orientation for
connecting the charger. If the charger is incorrectly connected,
damage to the accessory port will occur therefore voiding the phone’s
warranty.
5.
When charging is finished, first unplug the charger’s power
plug from the AC wall outlet, then disconnect the charger’s
connector from the phone.
Getting Started
12
Extending Your Battery Life
Active applications, light levels, Bluetooth usage, and GPS
functionality all act to drain your battery. The following is a list of
helpful tips that can help conserve your battery power:
• Use the Power Control shortcut bar.
• Reduce your backlight on time.
• Turn Bluetooth off when not in use.
• Turn Wi-Fi off when not in use.
• Deactivate the GPS when not needed. Most applications using this
function will periodically query the GPS satellites for your current
location; each query drains your battery.
• Do not wait until your battery is completely depleted before charging
your device. Repeating this process of a complete discharge and
recharge can over time reduce the storage capacity of any battery.
• Turn off Automatic application sync.
• Use the Power Control Widget to deactivate hardware functions such
as Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, GPS, Synchronization, or LCD brightness setting.
• Check the Battery use screen to review what features or functions
have been consuming your battery resources.
• Check the Running Services and close any unnecessary applications.
• Use the Task Manager feature to end/shutdown background
applications that are still running. These minimized applications can,
over time, cause your device to “slow down”.
13
• Animated wallpapers use processing power, memory, and more power.
Change your Live Wallpaper to a non-animated Wallpaper gallery or
Gallery image.
Power Control
Active applications, Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, GPS, Synchronization,
Location consent, or the LCD Brightness functionality all act to
drain your battery.
The Power Control shortcut bar was designed to quickly activate
(turn on), or deactivate (turn off) those functions or applications
that use the most battery power.
1.
From the Home screen,
touch and hold an empty
area until the Add to Home
screen menu displays.
2.
Tap Widgets ➔ Power
control. The Power Control
shortcut is added to the
current screen.
3.
Tap any of the icons on the Power Control shortcut bar to
activate/deactivate the feature.
With a SIM card installed
1.
If you do not have a SIM card installed the first time you turn on
the device, the Insert SIM card to make calls message displays
and an animated tutorial shows you how to install the SIM card.
At this point you can make an emergency call with the phone but
normal cell phone service is not available.
Without a SIM card installed
䊳
Tap Emergency call to make an emergency call.
– or –
1.
Tap Skip to ignore the SIM Card installation tutorial and
until the phone switches on.
The phone searches for your network and after finding it,
Note: A green bar displayed beneath the icon means the application is active
(turned on). The green bar is removed from beneath the icon when the
feature is deactivated (turned off).
Switching the Phone On or Off
Press and hold
you can make or receive calls.
Note: The display language is preset to English at the factory. To change the
language, use the Language menu. For more information, refer to
“Language & Keyboard Settings” on page 205.
2.
Press and hold
until the Phone options screen
appears.
3.
Tap Power off (
).
Locking and Unlocking the Phone
By default, the phone screen locks when the backlight turns off.
䊳
Place your finger on the screen and swipe the glass in any
of the directions shown unlock the phone.
configure various phone settings. Follow the on-screen
procedures.
Note: Selecting Location consent may drain battery power. For more
information, refer to “Power Control” on page 13.
2.
Tap Finish to end the tutorial.
Getting Started
14
Creating a New Google Account
You should create a Google™ Account when you first use your
device in order to fully utilize the functionality. This account
provides access to several device features such as Gmail, Google
Maps, Google Search, and the Android Market applications.
Before you are able to access Google applications, you must
enter your account information. These applications sync between
your device and your online Google account.
To create a new Google Account from your phone:
1.
From the Home screen, tap
2.
Read the introduction and tap Next ➔ Create to begin.
(Market).
3.
Follow the on-screen instructions to create a Google
Account.
– or –
If this is not the first time you are starting the phone, tap
➔
Note: You can choose to configure lock settings to prevent unauthorized use
of your phone. For more information, refer to “Setting up SIM Card
Lock” on page 196.
15
(Gmail).
Note: If you already have a Google account, you only need to sign in.
To create a new Google Account from the Web:
1.
From a computer, launch a Web browser and navigate to
www.google.com.
2.
On the main page, click Sign-in ➔ Sign up for a new Google
Account.
3.
4.
A Google account password is required for Google applications. If
you misplace or forget your Google Account password, follow
these instructions to retrieve it:
1.
Look for an email from Google in the email box you
your new account.
Signing into Your Google Account
Launch an application that requires a Google account
(such as Android Market or Gmail).
2.
Click Next ➔ Sign in.
3.
Tap the Username and Password fields and enter your
4.
Tap Sign in. Your device communicates with the Google
information.
From your computer, use an Internet browser and navigate
to http://google.com/accounts.
Follow the on-screen prompts to create your free account.
provided, and respond to the email to confirm and activate
1.
Retrieving your Google Account Password
2.
Click on the Can’t access your account? link.
3.
From the Forgot your password? section, enter your full
Gmail address and click Submit. Follow the password
recovery procedure.
Voice Mail
Setting Up Your Voice Mail
Your device automatically transfers all unanswered calls to
voicemail, even if your device is in use or turned off. As soon as
your battery is charged and the SIM card inserted, activate your
voicemail account.
Important!: Always use a password to protect against unauthorized access.
servers to confirm your information.
5.
If prompted, create a new Gmail username by entering a
prefix for your @gmail.com email address.
Getting Started
16
For new users, follow the instructions below to set up voice mail:
Accessing Your Voice Mail From Another Phone
1.
Dial your wireless phone number.
2.
When you hear your voicemail greeting, press the asterisk
Note: Voicemail setup may be different depending on your network.
1.
From the Home screen, tap
the
1
and then touch and hold
key until the phone dials voice mail.
You may be prompted to enter a password.
2.
Follow the tutorial to create a password, a greeting, and a
display name.
Accessing Your Voice Mail
From the Home screen, tap
1
will launch Visual voicemail is it is already
When connected, follow the voice prompts from the voice
mail center.
17
From the Home screen, tap
Visual Voicemail (
2.
(Applications) ➔
).
Read the on-screen information and tap Next ➔ Done to
activate Visual Voicemail if this is the first time it was
accessed.A list of the voicemail messages displays.
Note: You must subscribe to Visual Voicemail service to use this feature.
Charges may apply. Please contact your service provider for further
details.
3.
2.
Enter your passcode.
Visual Voicemail enables users to view a list of people who left a
voicemail message, and listen to the any message they want
without being limited to chronological order.
and then touch and hold
until the phone dials voice mail.
Note: Touching and holding 1
active on your phone.
3.
Visual Voicemail
1.
You can access your Voice Mail by either pressing and holding
1 on the keypad, by using the phone’s Application icon,
then touching the Voice Mail application. To access Voice Mail
using the menu:
1.
key on the phone you are using.
Tap an on-screen voicemail message to play it back.
Task Manager
Your phone can run applications simultaneously, with some
applications running in the background.
Sometimes your device might seem to slow down over time, and
the biggest reason for this are background applications. These
are applications that were not properly closed or shutdown and
are still active but minimized. The Task Manager not only lets you
see which of these applications are still active in the background
but also easily lets you choose which applications are left
running and which are closed.
Note: The larger the number of applications running on your phone, the
larger the energy drain on your battery.
From the Home screen, tap
Task Manager (
➔Task Manager (
1.
From the Home screen, tap
2.
From the Active applications tab, tap Exit to close selected
).
applications or tap Exit all to close all background running
Task Manger Overview
䊳
• Downloaded displays any installed packages or applications from
the Market that are taking up memory space. Tap Uninstall to
remove them from your phone.
• RAM, which displays the amount of current RAM (Random Access
Memory) currently being used and allow you to Clear memory for
either Level 1 or Level 2 (both Level memory locations).
• Storage displays a visual graph indicating the available and used
space within the Random Access Memory (RAM), Program, and
External SD card.
• Help provides additional battery saving techniques.
Shutting Down an Currently Active Application
(Applications) ➔
applications.
).
– or –
Press and hold
then tap Task Manager. This screen
contains the following tabs:
• Active applications display those currently active applications
running on your phone.
Getting Started
18
Section 2: Understanding Your Phone
This section outlines key features of your phone. It also describes
the phone’s keys, screen and the icons that display when the
phone is in use.
Features of Your Phone
Your phone is lightweight, easy-to-use and offers many
significant features. The following list outlines a few of the
features included in your phone.
• Touch screen with virtual (on-screen) QWERTY keyboard
• High Speed Packet Access Plus (HSPA+) delivering data speeds faster
than the current 3G network technology.
• Android 2.3 Gingerbread
• Compatible with Adobe® Flash®
• Wi-Fi ® Capability
• USB Tethering-capable
• Bluetooth enabled
• Full integration with Google applications (Gmail, YouTube, Google
Maps)
• Multiple Messaging Options: Email, Audio Postcard, Instant Messaging,
Picture Messaging, Google Talk™, Google Search, Video Messaging,
Text Messaging, Predictive Text
• Supports synchronizing with a corporate email account
19
• 5 Megapixel camera and video with autofocus, multi shot
8x digital zoom
• Brilliant widescreen Super AMOLED™ display
• MP3 player with Multitasking features
• Assisted GPS (TeleNav GPS Navigation)
• Webkit-based browser
• Downloadable applications from the Android Market
• Up to 32GB expandable memory slot
• Front Facing camera and preloaded Qik® application for Video Chat
• Mobile Hotspot Capability
• Pre-loaded e-reader applications such as: Google Books™
• Preloaded with the movie INCEPTION
• T-Mobile™ TV HD
• Samsung Media Hub
• E-Reader with preloaded Amazon® Kindle™ Application
• Slacker® Radio
• Wi-Fi® Calling for improved network coverage
• Samsung Media Hub®
Front View
The following list correlates to the illustrations.
The following illustrations show the main elements of your
phone:
15
14
13
1
1.
power cable or optional accessories such as a USB/data
cable.
12
2.
2
USB Power/Accessory connector allows you to connect a
11
3.
3
Volume key allows you to adjust the ringer volume in
standby mode (with the phone open) or adjust the voice
volume during a call. When receiving an incoming call:
10
9
Strap holder is used to connect a carrying strap to the
phone.
• Pressing the volume key down mutes the ring tone.
• Pressing and holding the volume key rejects the call.
4. Menu key displays a list of options available for the current
screen. From the Home screen it displays Add, Wallpaper,
Search, Notifications, Edit, and Settings options.
8
5.
Home key displays the Home screen when pressed.
6.
Microphone is used during phone calls and allows other
callers to hear you clearly when you are speaking to them.
It is also used to make voice note recordings.
7
4
5
6
Understanding Your Phone
20
7.
Quick search is used to search the device for applications,
surface of the screen. This is typically used to detect when
information.
your face is pressed up against the screen, such as during
8.
Back key redisplays the previous screen or clears entries.
a phone call.
9.
Display shows all the information needed to operate your
phone, such as the connection status, received signal
strength, phone battery level, and time.
10. Power/End key ends a call or switches the phone off and
on. Press and hold for two seconds to toggle Silent mode,
Flight mode, or to turn the Power off.
11. Front Facing Camera allows you to take pictures while
facing the screen and allows you to video conference.
12. Headset jack allows you to connect a hands-free headset
so you can listen to music.
13. Receiver allows you to hear the other caller and the
different ring tones or sounds offered by
your phone.
21
14. Proximity Sensor detects how close an object is to the
contact information, or searches the internet for
– While talking on the phone, the sensor detects talk activity and
locks the keypad to prevent accidental key presses.
15. Light Sensor lets you use the ambient light level to adjust
the screen brightness/contrast.
• In a bright light condition (outdoors), the sensors cause the device
to increase the brightness and contrast for better viewing.
• In dim light conditions, the device increases the screen brightness
to compensate.
Back View of Your Phone
Phone Display
The following illustration shows the external elements of your
phone:
1
Your phone’s display provides information about the phone’s
status, and is the interface to the features of your phone. The
display indicates your connection status, signal strength, battery
status and time. Icons display at the top of the phone when an
incoming call or message is received and also alerts you at a
specified time when an alarm was set. The screen also displays
notifications, and Application (or shortcut) bar with four icons:
Phone, Contacts, Messaging, and Applications.
Signal strength
Connection Status
Battery status
Status Bar
Time
2
1.
2.
Google search
Camera lens is used to take photos.
External speaker allows you to hear ringers, music, and
other sounds offered by your phone.
Notification
area
Status
area
Home Screen
Shortcuts
Primary
Shortcuts
Understanding Your Phone
22
Display settings
Indicates there is no signal available.
In this menu, you can change various settings for the for the
wallpaper, cube, brightness or backlight.
䊳
From the Home screen, tap
Displays when there is no SIM card in the phone.
(Applications) ➔
(Settings) ➔ Display. For more information, refer to
Displays when there is a system error or alert.
“Display Settings” on page 192.
Status Bar
The Status Bar shows information about the connection status,
signal strength, phone battery level, and time, and displays
notifications about incoming messages and calls and other
actions.
This list identifies the icons you see on your phone’s display
screen:
Indicator Icons
This list identifies the symbols you’ll see on your phone’s display
and Indicator area:
Displays your current signal strength. The greater the
number of bars, the stronger the signal.
Indicates that the Flight Mode is active. You cannot
send or receive any calls or access online information.
23
Displays when a call is in progress.
Displays when a call is on hold.
Displays when you have missed an incoming call.
Displays when the speakerphone is on.
Displays when Call forwarding is set to Always forward.
For more information, refer to “Configuring Voice Calls”
on page 188.
Displays your current battery charge level.
Icon shown is fully charged.
100%
Displays your current battery is 100 percent charged.
This icon is followed by an audible beep.
Displays when your phone is communicating with the
HSPA+ network.
Displays your battery is currently charging.
Displays when the phone is connected to a computer
using a supported USB cable connection.
Displays your current battery charge level is
very low.
Displays when there is a new text message.
Shows your current battery only has three percent
power remaining and will immediately shutdown.
Represented as a blinking icon.
Displays when an outgoing text message has failed to
be delivered.
Displays when connected to the EDGE network.
Displays when your phone is communicating with
the EDGE network.
Displays when there is a new voicemail message.
Displays when there is a new visual voicemail
message.
Displays when connected to the 3G network.
Displays in the notifications window when there is
a new Email message.
Displays when your phone is communicating with
the 3G network.
Displays when an alarm is set.
For more information, refer to “Setting an Alarm” on
page 177.
Displays when connected to the HSPA+ network.
Displays when the Sound profile is set to Silent mode
and Vibrate is set to Always or Only in silent mode.
Understanding Your Phone
24
Displays when data synchronization and application
sync is active and synchronization is in progress
for Gmail, Calendar, and Contacts.
Displays when the Sound profile is set to Silent
mode and Vibrate is set to Never or Only when
not in silent mode.
Displays when Bluetooth technology is active and
enabled.
Displays when the Bluetooth technology is active
and communicating with an external device.
Displays when Wi-Fi is connected, active, and
communicating with a Wireless Access Point (WAP).
Displays when Wi-Fi is active and there is an available
open wireless network.
Displays when the Mobile AP Hotspot feature is active
and communicating. For more information, refer to
“Mobile AP” on page 174.
Displays when the USB Tethering feature is active and
communicating. For more information, refer to
“Tethering” on page 183.
25
Displays when your phone’s GPS is on and
communicating.
Displays when the Wi-Fi calling feature is active.
Minutes used while connected to the Wi-Fi network
count against available rate plan minutes.
Displays when the Wi-Fi calling feature is active and
you are using it with within your current active call.
Displays when the external SD card (internal
microSD) has been disconnected (unmounted) from
the phone and is now ready for either removal or
formatting.
Displays when the External SD card is being prepared
for mounting to the device. This is required for
communication with the External SD card.
Displays when the phone has detected an active USB
connection and is in a USB Debugging mode or the
microSD card has been improperly removed.
For more details on configuring your phone’s settings, see
“Changing Your Settings” on page 180.
Notification Bar
The Notification area indicates new message events (data sync
status, new messages, calendar events, call status, etc). You can
expand this area to provide more detailed information about the
current on-screen notification icons.
1.
2.
Tap the Status bar to reveal the Notifications tab, and then
Note: The Notifications panel can also be opened on the Home screen by
pressing
and then tapping Notifications.
Clearing Notifications
To clear all notifications from the Notification panel:
1.
Tap the status bar to reveal the Notifications tab, and then
drag the tab to the bottom of the screen to open the
drag the tab to the bottom of the screen to open the
Notifications panel (1).
Notifications panel.
Tap a notification entry to open the associated
application (2).
2.
Tap Clear. The notifications are cleared from the panel.
Accessing Additional Panel Functions
In addition to notifications, this panel also provides quick and
ready access to five device functions. These can be quickly
activated or deactivated.
The following functions can either be activated (blue) or
deactivated (white): Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, GPS, Sound/Vibration, or
Auto rotation.
Understanding Your Phone
26
Function Keys
Your phone comes equipped with four main function keys that
can be used on any screen: Menu, Home, Back, and Search.
Menu Key
The Menu key (
) activates an available menu function for the
current screen or application. When on the Home screen, the
following menu options are available:
• Add (
) adds one of the following functions to a selected screen:
Widgets, Shortcuts, Folders, and Wallpapers.
• Wallpaper (
) lets you to customize the current screen’s
wallpaper image by choosing from either Home screen Wallpaper, Live
Wallpaper or Wallpaper gallery).
– You can obtain images from either your Pictures folder, from any of the
available images within the device’s Wallpaper gallery, or from the
animated Live Wallpapers.
• Search (
) displays the Google Search box that you can use to
search for a key term both on the phone and online.
• Notifications (
) allows you to expand popup notifications area to
provide more detailed information about the current on-screen
notification icons.
• Edit (
) allows you to add or remove extended screens from your
device. You can have up to eight extended screens.
27
• Settings (
) provides quick access to the device’s settings menu.
– The Settings menu can also be accessed by pressing
and then
tapping
➔ Settings.
Home Key
The Home key (
) takes you back to your Home screen (#4 of
the 7 total available screens).
䊳
Press and hold to launch the Recent Apps/Task Manager
screen. For more information, refer to “Accessing
Recently-Used Applications” on page 36.
Back Key
The Back key (
) returns you to the previously active screen.
If the on-screen keyboard is currently open, this key closes the
keyboard.
Search Key
Using Google Search
The Search key (
) displays the Google Search box that can
be used to search for either a key term both on the phone and
online. In some instances, this key opens a search box specific
only to the current application.
Search
Options
Voice Search
(speech to text)
Searchable
Items
Search
Field
1.
Press
to launch the Google Search box.
– or –
Press
2.
Tap
and tap
➔
.
to launch the Voice Search function.
Use the Google Search box to manually search for a term on both
your device and on the Web.
1.
Press
2.
Tap
to launch the Google Search box.
to select a search area:
• All searches your device, the Web, and the Android Market for your
search term.
• Web searches for your term only on the Web using the Google
search engine.
• Apps searches for your term only within the Android Market.
• Contacts searches for your term only within your current Contacts
entries.
• Searchable items launches the Searchable items menu where you
can enable/disable categories from which to search within.
3. Enter a search term and tap a match from the list of
suggestions, phone search results, or previously chosen
search matches. Once touched, the item opens in the
appropriate application.
– or –
Tapping Voice Search (
) lets you speak into your
device's microphone to enter a search term.
Understanding Your Phone
28
Using Additional Voice Search Functions
For more information, refer to:
http://www.google.com/mobile/voice-actions/.
From an open Voice Search dialog, speak the following words to
access additional features such as:
• voice actions (such as: [your query]) allows you to search the web by
speaking the search parameters.
• send text to [recipient] [message] allows you to open the Messaging
screen.
• listen to [artist/song/album] allows you to begin listening to the
selected song on Slacker radio.
• navigate to [address/city/business name] allows you to receive
directions via Google maps™. Use either an Address name, Business
name, business type, or other navigation information to get the desired
directions.
• call [business name] [plocation] allows you to open the phone
dialer and automatically dial a business entry and location such as
“call Vini’s Pizza Plano”.
• call [contact name] [phone type] allows you to open the phone dialer
and automatically dial a current contact and specify the category entry
such as “call Pat S home”.
29
• send email to [recipient] [subject] [body] allows you to open your
email account, address and compose a new email message.
• map of [location] allows you to view a map of an area via Google
maps. Use either an Address name, Business name, zip code, or other
navigation information.
• go to [website] allows you to navigate to any component of your
device.
• note to self [message] allows you to search for a note save to your
Memo Pad.
• directions to [location] using your current location, allows you to
receive directions to a selected destination.
Home Screen
• Notification area displays those icons associated with end-user
The Home screen is the starting point for using the applications
on your phone. There are seven available panels, each populated
with default shortcuts or applications. You can customize each of
these panels.
Status Bar
Notification
area
Status
area
Google search
bar/Widget
Home Screen
Shortcuts
Primary
Shortcuts
notifications such as: email messages, calls (missed, call in progress),
new voicemail, upcoming event, USB connection, emails, and
Text/MMS messages.
– These notifications appear at the top-left of the screen (within the
Status bar area) and display important user information.
– This information can be accessed by either swiping down from the
Status bar (page 26) or by accessing the Notifications panel [
>
Notifications (
)].
• Status area displays those icons associated with the status of the
device such as communication, coverage, Bluetooth, 4G and Wi-Fi
communication, battery levels, GPS, etc.
• Home Screen is a customizable screen that provides information
about notifications and device status, and allows access to application
Widgets.
• Extended Home Screens extend beyond the current visible screen
width to provide more space for adding icons, widgets, and other
customization features.
– There are seven available extended screens (panels) each of which
may be populated with its own shortcuts or widgets. These screens
share the use of the three Primary Shortcuts.
– The current screen is indicated at the top by a larger circle. Up to seven
(7) total screens are available.
Understanding Your Phone
30
Note: Both the status bar and primary shortcuts are visible across all
screens.
• Google search is an on-screen Internet search engine powered by
Google™. Touch to access the Voice Search feature where you can
verbally enter a search term and initiate an online search.
• Widgets are self-contained on-screen applications (not shortcuts).
These can be placed onto any of the available screens (Home or
extended).
• Shortcuts are icons that launch available device applications such as
Camera, YouTube, Voicemail, Contacts, Phone, Email, Market, etc.
These function the same as shortcuts on your computer.
– Although some may already be found on the Extended Home screens,
the majority can also be found within the Applications screens.
– The Application screens can be accessed by tapping Applications
(
) from the Primary shortcuts area.
– Shortcuts can be removed from a screen and added back any number
of times.
31
• Primary Shortcuts: are four shortcuts present throughout all of the
available screens and can be used to both navigate within the device
or launch any of the following functions:
– Phone (
) launches the phone-related screen functions (Dialer,
Call logs, Favorites, and Voicemail).
– Contacts (
) launches the Contacts-related screens (Contacts,
Groups, History, and Updates).
– Messaging (
) launches the Messaging menu (create new
messages or open an existing message string).
– Applications/Home toggles functionality between the Home and
Application screens.
• Tap Applications (
) to access the Application screens loaded
with every available local application.
• While in the Applications screens, tap the Home icon (
easily return to the Home screen.
) to
As you transition from screen to screen, the screen counter
(located at the top) displays the current panel number in a circle.
Screen Navigation
Widget
Navigating Through the Screens
Using the touch screen display and the keys, you can navigate
the features of your phone and enter characters. The following
conventions are used in this manual to describe the navigation
action in the procedures.
The following terms describe the most common hardware and
on-screen actions.
Counter displays
the currently
active screen
Press and hold
Tap
Touch and hold
Understanding Your Phone
32
• Press and hold: Pressing relates to use of the hardware keys and
buttons to select or activate an item. For example: press the
Navigation key to scroll through a menu. Some buttons and keys
require you to press and hold them to activate a feature, for example,
you press the Lock key to lock and unlock the phone.
• Tap: Use a brief touch to select items on the display or to enter text on
the virtual QWERTY keyboard. For example: touch an Application icon
to open the application. A light touch works best.
• Touch and hold: Touch and hold an icon or key to open the available
options, or to access a pop-up menu. For example: press and hold
from the Home screen to access a menu of customization options.
• Flick: Move your finger in lighter, quicker strokes than swiping. This
finger gesture is always used in a vertical motion, such as when
flicking through contacts or a message list.
• Swipe or slide: Quickly drag your finger vertically or horizontally
across the screen. This allows you to move the area of focus or to
scroll through a list. For example: slide your finger left or right on the
Home screen to scroll among the seven panels.
• Drag: Press and hold your finger with some pressure before you start
to move it. Do not release your finger until you have reached the target
position.
Swipe or slide
and Drag
Flick
Rotate
• Rotate: Automatically change the screen orientation from portrait to
landscape by turning the device sideways. For example: rotate to
landscape orientation when entering text, to provide a larger keyboard,
or when viewing web content to minimize scrolling.
33
• Pinch: “Pinch” the screen using your thumb and forefinger to zoom
out when viewing a picture or a Web page. (Move fingers inward to
zoom out.)
• Spread: “Spread” the screen using your thumb and forefinger to zoom
in when viewing a picture or a Web page. (Move fingers outward to
zoom in.)
Pinch (Zoom Out)
Menu Navigation
You can tailor the phone’s range of functions to fit your needs
using both menus and applications. Menus, sub-menus, and
features are accessed by scrolling through the available
on-screen menus. Your phone defaults with seven home screens.
Navigating Through the Application Menus
There are four default Application Menus available. As you add
more applications from the Android Marketplace, more screens
are created to house these new apps.
1.
Press
and then tap
(Applications). The first
Application Menu displays.
Spread (Zoom In)
2.
• To close the Applications screen, tap
or press
Sweep the screen to access the other menus.
.
3.
Tap any of the on-screen icons to launch the associated
application.
Note: These screens can be re-arranged in any desired order. For more
information, refer to “Customizing Your Screens” on page 43.
Understanding Your Phone
34
Using Sub-Menus
Using Context Menus
Sub-menus are available from within most screen and
applications.
1.
Press
. A sub-menu displays at the bottom of the
phone screen.
2.
Context menus (also called pop-up menus) contain options that
apply to a specific item on the screen. They function similarly to
menu options that appear when you right click your mouse on
your desktop computer.
䊳
Tap an option.
Touch and hold an item on-screen to open its context
menu.
Context
Menu
Sub-Menu items
35
Accessing Recently-Used Applications
1.
Press and hold the
to open the recently-used
applications window.
Note: This recent applications screen also provides access to the Task
Manager.
2.
A pop-up displays the six most recently used applications.
3.
Tap an icon to open the recent application.
Applications
The Application menu provides quick access to the most
frequently used applications. Applications display on each of the
three panels on the Applications screens.
The following table contains a description of each application
available via both the Primary shortcuts area and via the
Applications screens. If the application is already described in
another section of this user manual, then a cross reference to
that particular section is provided. For information on navigating
through the Applications icons, see “Navigating Through the
Application Menus” on page 34.
Accounts and sync
Allows you to add applications and determine which
type of account information you want to synchronize
with your Contact list. For more information, refer to
“Accounts and Synchronization” on page 201.
Add to Home
Allows you to add Widgets, Shortcuts, Folders, or
Wallpapers to the current screen.
For more information about Add to Home, see “To add a
shortcut via the Add to Home screen:” on page 46.
Alarm & Clocks
Allows you to set an alarm, configure and view the
World clock, use a stopwatch, or set a timer. The
applications display in a tabular format and quickly
accessed with the touch of a finger.
For more information refer to Alarms & Clocks on
page 177, World clock on page 178, Stopwatch on
page 178, or Setting a Timer on page 179 of this user
guide.
Understanding Your Phone
36
AllShare
Calculator
Allows you to share your on-device media content
with other external devices using DLNA (Digital Living
Network Alliance) and built-in AllShare™ technology.
Samsung’s AllShare makes staying connected easy.
Launches the on-screen calculator application. The
calculator provides the basic arithmetic functions;
addition, subtraction, multiplication, and division. You can
also use this as a scientific calculator.
For more information, refer to “AllShare” on page 131.
For more information, refer to “Calculator” on page 134.
Amazon Kindle
Calendar
Opens the Amazon Kindle™ store that provides access
to thousands of online digital books and publications.
These documents can be downloaded directly to
your device. For more information, refer to “Amazon
Kindle” on page 133.
Launches a calendar application that syncs to your
Facebook™, Google™, or Microsoft Exchange work
calendars.
Amazon MP3
Launches the Amazon MP3 music download service
where you can download DRM-Free (digital rights
management) MP3 formatted songs and albums.
For more information, refer to “Amazon MP3” on
page 121.
Books
Use Google Books to read over 3 million ebooks on the go.
For more information, refer to “Books” on page 134.
37
For more information, refer to “Calendar” on page 176.
Call Logs
Provides a list detailing all the calls that have been
missed, received, or dialed. For more information, refer to
“Call Logs Tab” on page 66.
Camcorder
In addition to taking photos, the built-in camera also
doubles as a camcorder that also allows you to record,
view, and send high definition videos. For more
information, refer to “Using the Camcorder” on
page 120.
Camera
Downloads
Launches the built-in 5.0 megapixel camera application
from where you can take a picture with either the front or
rear facing cameras.
Provides quick access to tabs containing a list of your
current downloaded files (Internet and Other).
Note: An SD card must be inserted before the camera will take
and store photos.
For more information, refer to “Using the Camera” on
page 112.
Car Home
Configures the phone’s user interface to be easier to use
while you are driving. For more information, refer to “Car
Home” on page 136.
For more information, refer to “Downloads” on page 137.
DRIVE
SMART
DriveSmart
Launches the DriveSmart application that can be used to
reduce distractions from your phone by silencing
notifications, routing calls to voicemail and customizing
auto responses to both callers and text message
respondents notifying them that your driving.
For more information, refer to “DriveSmart” on page 137.
Email
The default storage location for saving phone numbers to
your Contacts List is your phone’s built-in memory.
Provides access to both your Outlook (Exchange Serverbased) work email and Internet email accounts (such as
Gmail and Yahoo! Mail). For more information, refer to
“Email” on page 104.
For more information, refer to “Contacts List” on page 82.
Facebook
Desk Home
Launches the Facebook application. For more
information, refer to “Facebook” on page 138.
Contacts
Configures the phone’s user interface to mimic a desktop
layout. For more information, refer to “Desk Home” on
page 137.
Understanding Your Phone
38
Files
Inception
Lets you view supported image files and text files on your
microSD card. Organize and store data, images, and more
in your own personal file folders. Files are stored to the
memory card in separate (user defined) folders.
This movie is preloaded on the microSD card included
with this phone. Just insert the microSD card, tap the
Home screen icon and enjoy. For more information, refer
to “INCEPTION” on page 123.
For more information, refer to “Files” on page 121.
Latitude
Gallery
Lets you see your friends’ locations and share yours
with them. The application also lets you see your
friends’ locations on a map or in a list. It also lets you
send instant messages and emails, make phone calls,
and get directions to your friends’ locations.
Displays a Gallery of camera images and video stored in
the microSD card. For more information, refer to “The
Gallery” on page 122.
Gmail
Provides access to your Gmail account. Google Mail
(Gmail) is a web-based email service. Gmail is configured
when you first set up your phone. For more information,
refer to “Using Google Mail” on page 110.
Google Search
Provides an on-screen Internet search engine powered by
Google™. For more information, refer to “Using Google
Search” on page 28.
39
For more information, refer to “Latitude” on page 139.
Layar
Works by using a combination of the mobile
phone’s camera, compass and GPS data to identify
the user’s location and field of view, retrieve data
based on those geographical coordinates, and
overlay that data over the camera view.
For more information, refer to “Layar” on page 140.
Maps
Messaging
Launches a Web-based dynamic map that helps you find
local businesses, locate friends, view maps and get
driving directions. For more information, refer to “Maps”
on page 140.
Provides access to text and multimedia messaging (SMS
and MMS). For more information, refer to “Creating and
Sending Messages” on page 98.
Market
Allows you to create a mini diary where you can add a
photo, and text to describe an event or other memorable
life event.
Allows you to find and download free and for-purchase
applications on Android Market. For more information,
refer to “Downloading a New Google Application” on
page 143.
Media Hub
Provides one-stop access to the hottest movies and TV
programs that you can rent or buy and watch anytime,
anywhere. For more information, refer to “Media Hub” on
page 123.
Memo
Creates new text memos. For more information, refer to
“Memo” on page 145.
Mini Diary
For more information, refer to “Mini Diary” on page 146.
Music Player
Launches the built-in Music Player that allows you
to play music files that you have stored on your
microSD card. You can also create playlists. For more
information, refer to “Music Player” on page 125.
My Account
Provides you with account specific information such as:
current status, Activity, Set Alerts, Bill Summary, Plan
Services, and FAQ’s Info. For more information, refer to
“My Account” on page 147.
Understanding Your Phone
40
My Device
Settings
Allows you to configure device settings, view Personalize
your CallerTunes, Ringtones, or Wallpapers, View Quick
Tools, Support, and battery storage information. For more
information, refer to “My Device” on page 148.
Accesses the device’s built-in Settings menu. For more
information, refer to “Changing Your Settings” on
page 180.
Navigation
Slacker offers free, internet radio for mobile phones.
Launches a Web-based navigation application.
For more information, refer to “Slacker” on page 152.
Caution!: Traffic data is not real-time and directions may be
wrong, dangerous, prohibited, or involve ferries.
Swype Tips
For more information, refer to “Navigation” on page 149.
News & Weather
Launches a Web-based news and weather feed based
on your current location. For more information, refer to
“News and Weather” on page 151.
Places
Displays company logos on a layer of Google Maps.
When viewing an area you can quickly locate a business
or person, find out more information about the business,
see coupons, public responses, and more. For more
information, refer to “Places” on page 151.
41
Slacker
Provides an on-screen video tutorial that teaches you
how to use Swype text input method. For more
information, refer to “Swype Text Entry Tips” on page 72.
T-Mobile TV HD
Allows you to watch live mobile TV on your phone. This
application is a subscription service. For more
information, refer to “T-Mobile TV HD” on page 152.
Talk
Launches a Web-based Google Talk application that
lets you chat with family and friends over the Internet for
free. For more information, refer to “Google Talk” on
page 111.
Task Manager
Videos
Use Task Manager to see which applications are running
on your phone, and to end running applications to extend
battery life.
Launches your device’s built-in video application
that plays video files stored on your microSD card.
For more information, refer to “Using the Video Player” on
page 123.
For more information, refer to “Task Manager” on
page 153.
TeleNav GPS
This driving aid provides both audible and visual
navigation instructions for GPS navigation. For more
information, refer to “TeleNav GPS” on page 153.
ThinkFree Office
ThinkFree Office Mobile for Android is a Microsoft Office
compatible office suite. This application provides a
central place for managing your documents online or
offline.
For more information, refer to “ThinkFree Office” on
page 154.
Video Chat
Allows you to record and share live videos on your device
with your friends, family, and your favorite social
networks. For more information, refer to “Video Chat” on
page 154.
Visual Voicemail
Visual Voicemail enables users to view a list of people who
left a voicemail message, and listen to the any message
they want without being limited to chronological order.
For more information, refer to “Visual Voicemail” on
page 17.
Voice Dialer
Launches your device’s built-in voice recognition
software, called Voice Dialer, to dial a phone number in
your Contacts or to launch phone functions. For more
information, refer to “Using the Voice Dialer” on page 55.
Voice Recorder
Allows you to record an audio file up to one minute long
and then immediately send it as a message. For more
information, refer to “Voice Recorder” on page 156.
Understanding Your Phone
42
Voice Search
YouTube
Launches your phone’s built-in voice recognition
software and initiates a Google search based on the
recognized text. For more information, refer to “Voice
Search” on page 156.
Launches the YouTube webpage via the browser.
For more information, refer to “YouTube” on page 129.
Web
Open the browser to start surfing the web. The browser is
fully optimized and comes with advanced functionality to
enhance the Internet browsing feature on your phone.
For more information, refer to “Web” on page 159.
Wi-Fi Calling
Provides the ability to use your available Wi-Fi data
connection to make outbound calls that count against
your minutes. Similar to VOIP (Voice Over IP). For more
information, refer to “Wi-Fi Calling” on page 59.
Write and Go
Use write and go to jot down an idea, then decide what
format you want to use: Text message (SMS)/Multimedia
message (MMS), email, calendar, or memo.
For more information, refer to “Write and Go” on
page 157.
43
Customizing Your Screens
You can customize the Home screens (panels) to display the
Widgets, Shortcuts, Folders, or Wallpapers. For example, one
screen could contain the Music Player shortcut and other forms
of media, while another screen might contain communication
apps such as Gmail and IM.
You can customize your Home screen by doing the following:
• Adding, Deleting, and Rearranging screens
• Adding and Removing Shortcuts
• Adding and Removing Widgets
• Creating Folders
• Changing the Background (Wallpapers)
Adding and Deleting Screens
Your phone comes with seven screens. You can delete these
screens and then add them back later.
To add a screen:
Press
2.
Tap the Add icon (
3.
To delete a screen:
1.
➔
Press
then tap Edit (
2.
to the Remove tab
(
3.
Press
).
to return to
the main Home screen.
Press
to return to the main Home screen.
➔
1.
Press
2.
Touch and hold a screen and then drag it into its new
and then tap Edit (
).
location. Upper-left is screen position #1 and bottom-right
).
undesired screen down
).
). The newly added screen appears
Rearranging the Screens
and
Touch and drag the
and then tap Edit (
as the last page.
Note: These screens can be deleted and re-arranged.
Important!: Your phone can only contain at most seven screens and at least
one screen.
➔
1.
is screen position #7.
Adding and Removing Primary Shortcuts
The device comes with four Primary shortcuts: Phone, Contacts,
Messaging, and Applications/Home. As long as the menu is
displayed in a Customizable grid, you can replace the Phone,
Contacts, and Messaging shortcuts with other applications so
you access the shortcuts that are most frequently used.
1.
Press
2.
Press
and then tap Applications (
).
and then tap View type ➔ Customizable grid.
Understanding Your Phone
44
3.
Press
and then tap Edit. A box outline then appears
around the application icons.
4.
Scroll through the list and locate the desired application.
5.
Touch and hold the on-screen icon, then drag it over one of
To add a shortcut from the Applications screen:
1.
2.
to return to the Home screen.
Select a location (screen)
for your new shortcut by
scrolling across your
• The new primary shortcut displays at the bottom of the screen. and
the previous primary shortcuts switches places with your selected
icon.
6. Press
and then tap Save.
Tap
to go to the
Home screen.
the four primary shortcuts to replace it.
7.
Press
available screens until
you reach the desired
one.
3.
Managing Shortcuts
Tap Applications (
) to
reveal all your current
available applications. By
Note: To move a shortcut from one screen to another, you must carefully
touch and hold the shortcut and slowly drag it to the edge of the
screen. As the shortcut turns light blue, you can begin to move it to the
adjacent screen.
If this does not work, delete it from its current screen. Activate the new
screen and then add the selected shortcut.
default, applications are displayed as an Alphabetical grid.
4.
Scroll across the screens and locate your desired
application.
5.
Touch and hold the on-screen icon. The new shortcut then
appears to hover over the current screen.
6.
While still holding the on-screen icon, position it on the
current screen. Once complete, release the screen to lock
the shortcut into its new position.
45
Adding and Removing Widgets
To add a shortcut via the Add to Home screen:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Press
to go to the
Home screen.
Widgets are self-contained applications that can be placed on
any screen. Unlike shortcuts, widgets appear as applications.
Touch and hold an empty
To add a Widget:
area of the screen.
1.
Press
From the Add to Home
2.
Touch and hold an empty area of the screen.
screen window tap
3.
From the Add to Home screen window tap Widgets.
Shortcuts.
4.
Tap an available Widget to place it on your current screen.
Tap a selection from the
To remove a Widget:
available list.
1.
To delete a shortcut:
Press
to go to the Home screen.
2.
Touch and hold the desired shortcut. This unlocks it from
from the current
its location on the current screen.
Drag the shortcut over the Remove tab (
it.
Touch and hold a
Widget until it unlocks
1.
3.
to go to the Home screen.
screen.
2.
) and release
Drag the widget over
the Remove tab (
)
and release it.
• As you place the Widget
into the Trash, both items
turn red.
Understanding Your Phone
46
• This action doesn’t delete the Widget, it just removes it from the
current screen.
To place a widget onto a different screen:
1.
Touch and hold the widget until it becomes transparent.
2.
Drag it to the edge of your screen.
3.
Slowly drag it past the edge of the screen until it turns light
Renaming a folder
1.
Tap the desired folder you want to rename.
2.
With the folder open, touch and hold the Folder title bar
(top of the Folder window) until the Rename folder pop-up
displays.
3.
blue.
and tap OK.
4.
Drag the widget to its desired position on the new screen.
5.
Repeat these steps to continue moving it to other screens.
Deleting a folder
1.
Creating and Managing a Folder
Folders hold items that you want to organize and store together
on the workspace.
To create a new on-screen folder:
1.
Press
2.
Touch and hold an empty area of the screen.
3.
From the Add to Home screen window tap Folders.
4.
Tap an available folder type and place it on the current
screen.
47
Tap the folder name field, enter a new title for this folder
to go to the Home screen.
Touch and hold a desired folder. This unlocks it from its
location on the current screen.
2.
Drag the folder over the Remove tab (
) and release it.
Managing Wallpapers
Wallpapers consist of either Gallery images (user taken), Live
wallpapers (animated backgrounds), or Wallpaper gallery (default
phone wallpapers).
Note: Selecting animated Live wallpapers will require additional battery
power.
To change the current wallpaper:
1.
Press
2.
Touch and hold an empty area of the screen.
to go to the Home screen.
3.
From the Add to Home screen window tap Wallpapers.
4.
Select a Wallpaper:
• Tap Gallery to select from a user image stored in the camera image
gallery, crop the image, and tap Save.
• Tap Live wallpapers to select from a list of animated backgrounds,
once done tap Set wallpaper.
• Tap Wallpaper gallery, scroll through the images, tap a wallpaper
image, then tap Set wallpaper.
Understanding Your Phone
48
Section 3: Memory Card
Your device lets you use a microSD (SD) or microSDHC card
(also referred to as a memory card) to expand available memory
space. This secure digital card enables you to exchange images,
music, and data between SD-compatible devices. This section
addresses the features and options of your device’s SD
functionality. The device has a USB SD card mode.
• microSD card storage: up to 2GB in size
• SDHC card storage: up to 32GB in size
Using the SD Card
There are several methods for using the SD card:
1.
Connecting to your PC to store files (such as music, videos,
or other types of files and media).
2.
After mounting an SD card in the device you can use your
computer to access and manage the SD card.
Important!: If access to the external SD card is not available, download and
install the USB drivers.
microSD Icon Indicators
The following icons show your microSD card connection status at
a glance:
• the card has been unmounted (released from
use) from the device.
To activate the camera, video, music player, and other
dependant media or applications.
Important!: The Camera, Audio Postcard, Music Player, and Video
functionality is all dependant on a mounted SD card. Your device
can support SDHC cards up to 32GB capacity.
49
SD card Overview
• the card is being prepared for use and for
mounting.
• the card has been improperly removed.
Important!: DO NOT remove a microSD card while the device is accessing or
transferring files. Doing so will result in loss or damage of data.
Make sure your battery is fully charged before using the microSD
card. Your data may become damaged or lost if the battery runs
out while you are using the microSD card.
Mounting the SD Card
5.
computer display icons to show that the device is
mounted. As soon as the connection is established a drive
letter is assigned to the phone’s storage device.
6.
To store photos, music, videos, and other applications. You must
mount (install) the SD card prior to use. Mounting the SD card
establishes a USB connection with your computer.
Important!: You must enable USB storage to mount the SD card.
Later, tap Disconnect storage from PC to close the USB
connection between the phone and your computer.
Unmounting the SD card
Unmounting the SD card prevents corruption and damage to the
SD card while removing it from the slot.
1.
To mount the SD card:
1.
Touch Connect storage to PC ➔ OK. Both the phone and
Press
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔
SD card and phone storage.
Insert the SD card into the external, SD card slot (For more
information, refer to “Installing the microSD Memory Card”
on page 9.)
2.
Press and hold
to turn on the phone.
3.
Connect the USB cable to the phone and connect the cable
2.
Tap Unmount SD card ➔ OK.
3.
When the “SD card will be unmounted” message displays
and the Mount SD card now appears in the menu list, open
the phone and remove the SD card. For more information,
refer to “Installing the microSD Memory Card” on page 9.
to the computer.
4.
Tap Mass storage. The “USB connected” screen is
displayed.
Memory Card
50
SD card Memory Status
Factory Data Reset
To view the memory allocation for your external SD card:
䊳
Press
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔
SD card and phone storage. The available memory
From this menu you can reset your phone and sound settings to
the factory default settings.
1.
headings.
2.
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔
Tap Factory data reset. This action erases all data from
your phone except current system software and bundled
Erasing Files from the SD card
applications, or SD card files such as music or photos.
You can erase files from the SD card using the phone.
1.
Press
Privacy.
displays under the Total space and Available space
Ensure the SD card is mounted. For more information,
Note: You also have the option to format the phone’s microSD Storage.
refer to “Unmounting the SD card” on page 50.
2.
Press
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔
3.
Tap Format USB storage to erase all data stored on the
4.
Tap Reset phone ➔ Erase everything.
device’s internal storage area.
SD card and phone storage ➔ Unmount SD card ➔ OK.
3.
Tap Format SD card ➔ Format SD card ➔ Erase everything
to format the SD card. The SD card formats and erases all
the data stored on it.
51
Section 4: Call Functions and Contacts List
This section describes features and functionality associated with
making or answering calls, and the Contacts list, which is used to
store contact information.
Displaying Your Phone Number
䊳
Press
➔
and then tap
Note: When you activate the Auto redial option in the Call settings menu, the
phone automatically redials up to 10 times when the person does not
answer the call or is already on the phone, provided your call is not
sent to voice mail.
Ending a Call
(Settings) ➔
About phone ➔ Status. Your phone number displays in the
䊳
Briefly tap
key to end the call.
Phone number field.
Note: The phone’s Settings menu can also be activated by pressing
then tapping
➔
(Settings).
and
You can store phone numbers that are regularly used to the SIM
card or to the phone’s memory. These entries are referred to as
the Contacts list.
Press
2.
Enter the phone number to dial then press
and then tap
䊳
If you make a mistake while dialing, touch
the last digit. Touch and hold
, tap a number from the Call logs
If you exit the current call screen and return to the Home screen,
You are visually notified that you are still on an active call by the
green bar within the Status bar.
Making a Call
1.
Note: To redial a recent number, tap
list, and tap Call.
In Call Notification
.
Call
.
to clear
to clear the entire
sequence.
Call Functions and Contacts List
52
Ending a Call from the Status Bar
1.
Tap the Status bar to reveal the Notifications tab, and then
drag the tab to the bottom of the screen to open the
Notifications panel (1).
2.
Tap End to close the currently active call (2).
Dialing Options
When you enter numbers on the
Keypad, you will see three onscreen options.
From the keypad screen, use
one of the following options:
• Call ( Call ) to call the entered
number.
• Delete (
) to delete digits
from the current number.
• Voice Dialer (
) to launch
the voice recognition application.
• Voice Mail (
) to access
your Voice Mail service.
To view additional dialing
options, tap
:
• Add to Contacts to add the current number to either a new or existing
Contacts entry.
• Speed dial setting to access the Speed Dialing menu where you can
assign a speed dial location to a current Contacts entry.
• Send message to send the current caller a text message while still
maintaining the current call active.
53
• Add 2 sec pause to insert a two-second pause to enter a
2-second delay within a number string (the phone continues dialing
after 2 seconds without any additional keys being pressed).
• Add wait to insert a hard pause within the number string (the phone
waits for your input). A wait requires that any consecutive numbers be
manually sent by tapping Yes.
Answering a Call
When somebody calls you, the phone rings and displays the
incoming call image.
Touch and drag
upward to reject
with a message
Touch and slide
right to answer
the call
Touch and slide
left to reject
the call
The caller's phone number, picture, or name if stored in Contacts
List, displays.
䊳
At the incoming call screen:
• Touch and slide
to the right to answer the call.
• Touch and slide
to the left to reject the call.
• Touch and drag the Reject call with message tab upward and
touch a predefined rejection message.
Pressing the Volume down button mutes the ringer.
If the incoming call is from a number stored in your Contacts, the
entry’s name is displayed. You may also see the caller’s phone
number, if available.
Prefix Dialing
When activated, this feature automatically prepends a string of
numbers (such as an area code) to any dialed number. This
feature is useful for international dialing, or dialing within an area
code where all the calls you make for a period of time use one
prefix.
1.
From the Home screen, press
and then tap
(Settings) ➔ Call settings ➔ All calls ➔ Prefix dialing.
2.
Tap the Enable prefix dialling field. A check mark indicates
the Prefix dialling feature is active.
Call Functions and Contacts List
54
To add a prefix:
1.
3.
From the Home screen, press
and then tap
– or –
(Settings) ➔ Call settings ➔ All calls ➔ Prefix dialing ➔
Enable prefix dialling.
2.
Enter a prefix number using the keypad and tap Save. The
prefix displays in the Prefix dialing list.
4.
6.
When the Voice Dialer displays the “Listening” prompt, say
one of the following commands:
automatically added to the dialed number.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Tap another prefix in the Prefix dialing list to change
From the Home screen, press
and then tap
➔
list.
Press
and then tap Delete.
(Applications) ➔
(Voice Dialer).
2.
Call settings ➔ All calls ➔ Prefix dialing ➔ Prefix dialling
55
From the Home screen, tap
Each time you dial a number, the activated prefix is
To delete a prefix:
2.
Voice dialer is a voice recognition software used to activate a wide
variety of functions on your phone.
1.
prefixes.
1.
Tap Delete.
Using the Voice Dialer
Tap the white circle icon beside the prefix. A green icon
indicates the selection of a prefix.
5.
Tap Select all.
4.
Tap Prefix dialling list ➔ Create. The list is empty until you
add a prefix.
3.
Tap selected prefixes to remove from them from the list.
“Call John Doe”
“Call John Doe at home,...”
“Call vicennial”
“Dial (866) 555 0123”
“Dial 911, 811,...”
“Dial +44 7333 444 555”
“Redial”
“Open Calendar”
3.
A menu prompts you to confirm your selection.
1.
2.
1.
From the Home screen, tap
2.
Press
and then tap Add 2 sec pause. This feature
adds an automatic two-second pause.
are prompted to select from multiple options.
International Calls
and use the on-screen
keypad to enter the phone number.
If you said a name with more than one match in Contacts,
or if you stored more than one number for the contact, you
From the Home screen, tap
3.
Use the keypad to enter the additional numbers that will be
dialed automatically after the second pause.
, then touch and hold
. The + symbol displays.
Use the on-screen keypad to enter the country code, area
code, and phone number.
• If you make a mistake, tap
once to delete a single digit.
• Touch and hold
to delete all digits.
3. Tap
Call .
Tip: You can create pauses longer than two seconds by entering multiple
2-sec pauses.
4.
Tap
Call
.
Pause Dialing
You can dial or save phone numbers with pauses for use with
automated systems, such as voicemail or financial phone
numbers.
• 2-Second Pause automatically sends the next set of numbers after
a two-second pause. This is indicated in the number string as a
comma (,).
• Wait sends the next set of numbers only after tapping Send . This is
indicated in the number string as a semicolon (;).
Call Functions and Contacts List
56
Wait Dialing
Redialing the Last Number
Inserting a Wait into your dialing
sequence means that the phone
waits until it hears a dial tone
before proceeding with the next
sequence of numbers.
1.
2.
To recall any of these numbers:
1.
From the Home screen, tap
From the Home screen,
2.
Tap the Call logs tab to display the list of recent calls.
tap
3.
Tap the name/number and tap
and use the
on-screen keypad to
– or –
enter the phone number.
Tap
Press
and then tap
Add wait. This feature
causes the phone to
require your acceptance
before sending the next set of entered digits.
57
The phone stores the numbers of the calls you’ve dialed,
received, or missed if the caller is identified.
Call
3.
Tap
4.
Once prompted, tap Send to dial the remaining digits.
.
.
Call .
to the right of the name/number.
Speed Dialing
Once you have stored phone numbers from your Contacts List,
you can set up to 8 speed dial entries and then dial them easily
whenever you want, simply by touching the associated numeric
key.
Setting Up Speed Dial Entries
Important!: Speed dial location #1 is reserved for Voicemail. No other
number can be assigned to this slot.
1.
From the Home screen,
tap
2.
.
Press
and then tap
Speed dial setting. The
Changing a Speed Dial Entry
1.
From the Home screen, tap
2.
Press
with the numbers 1
through 9.
3.
4.
Tap an unassigned
and then tap Speed dial setting.
Important!: The number 1 is reserved for Voicemail and another number
cannot be assigned to this slot.
3.
Press
4.
In a single motion, touch and drag an entry over another
Speed dial screen
displays a virtual keypad
.
and then tap Change order.
location on the virtual keypad.
5.
Tap Save to store the new assignment.
6.
Press
to return to the previous screen.
Removing a Speed Dial Entry
number. The Contacts
1.
From the Home screen, tap
.
screen displays.
2.
Press
Tap a contact and select
3.
Touch and hold an on-screen speed dial location and
and then tap Speed dial setting.
a number to assign to the speed dial location. The selected
select Remove from the context menu.
contact number/image is displayed in the speed dial
– or –
number box.
Press
and then tap Remove. Tap an entry and select
Remove.
Call Functions and Contacts List
58
4.
Press
to return to the previous screen.
Making a Call Using Speed Dial
You can assign a short cut number to a phone number in the
Contacts List for speed dialing.
1.
From the Home screen, tap
2.
Touch and hold a speed dial location (numbers 2-9, or 1 if
Important!: Wi-Fi must first be active and communicating prior to launching
Wi-Fi Calling.
Activating Wi-Fi
1.
.
If you are not certain of the speed dial location, tap
➔
➔ Speed dial setting and tap a speed dial
number to view the assigned phone number.
Wi-Fi Calling
Wi-Fi Calling is a free feature for T-Mobile customers with a Wi-Fi
capable phone. Wi-Fi Calling is an excellent solution for coverage
issues in and around the home or wherever cellular coverage is
limited. Minutes used while connected to the Wi-Fi network
count against available rate plan minutes.
The benefits of Wi-Fi Calling include the following:
• Wi-Fi Calling provides a coverage option to improve upon your current
in-home coverage experience
• Wi-Fi Calling works anywhere there is an open Wi-Fi signal available
59
➔
and then tap
➔ Wireless and
network ➔ Wi-Fi settings.
2.
you are dialing voice mail) until the number begins to dial.
3.
Press
Tap Wi-Fi to turn it on. A checkmark displays to indicate
activation.
3.
Tap an available WAP (Wireless Access Point) from within
the Wi-Fi networks area of the page. Follow the on-screen
instructions to complete connection.
Note: To avoid international data roaming fees when using Wi-Fi calling
when outside the United States, the Data Roaming feature on your
device must be turned off.
Note: With certain rate plans, minutes used while connected to the Wi-Fi
network count against available rate plan minutes.
Launching Wi-Fi Calling
3.
If prompted, tap Register to communicate with the network
and register your phone for this service.
Note: Verify you are currently connected to a Wireless Access Point.
4.
1.
If not already
Ensure that the Wi-Fi connected icon displays on the
activated, tap the
status bar. The network names and security settings (Open
slider to activate
network or Secured with WEP) of detected Wi-Fi networks
Wi-Fi Calling. The
display in the Wi-Fi networks section.
slider shows On.
Your device
Note: When you select an open network you are automatically connected.
connects to the
T-Mobile
Wi-Fi Connected
Wi-Fi Calling
activation
slider
Network.
Displays when Wi-Fi is connected, active, and
communicating with a Wireless Access Point (WAP).
5.
If prompted, tap
Confirm to
Wi-Fi Communication Issue
Displays when Wi-Fi is active and there is an available
open wireless network.
register the service on the network (for first time users).
For more information, refer to “Making a Call” on page 52.
Important!: Wi-Fi calling using plan minutes.
2.
From the Home screen, tap
➔
(Wi-Fi Calling).
Call Functions and Contacts List
60
When
Action
In Call Options
Then
Displays on the You are connected to the
screen status
T-Mobile network and can
bar.
make Wi-Fi calls.
Displays on the The feature is active and you
screen status
are using with within your
bar.
current active call.
Does not display You are charged normal calling
on the screen
rate minutes. For more
status bar.
information, refer to “Activating
Wi-Fi” on page 180.
Your phone provides a number of features that are available for
use during a call.
Speakerphone
indicator
Place a call
on hold
Dials the
number
Adds a
Ends the
call
new call
6.
Use the phone Dialer, call log, or contacts list to make a
Activates
speakerphone
call.
7.
Confirm you established a Wi-Fi calling connection to the
T-Mobile network by making sure
of the screen and
8.
61
appears at the top
appears during the call.
Go to the dialer and make a call.
Mutes or Unmutes
the current call
Activates or
Deactivates
Bluetooth
Headset
Adjusting the Call Volume
To make a new call while a call is in progress:
Enter the new phone number that you wish to dial or look it
During a call, use the Volume keys on the left side of the phone,
to adjust the earpiece volume.
1.
Press the Up volume key to increase the volume level and
2.
Tap Add call to dial the second call.
3.
Dial the new phone number and tap
䊳
the Down volume key to decrease the level.
up in Call history.
– or –
From the screen during a call, press the Up Volume key.
䊳
From the Home screen, you can also adjust the ring volume using
these keys.
To place a call on hold:
1.
2.
Tap Hold to place the current call on hold.
Tap Unhold to activate the call that is on hold.
.
Tap Swap.
The In call number turns gray and displays On hold. The
active call displays a green background behind the
Placing a Call on Hold
You can place the current call on hold whenever you want. If your
network supports this service, you can also make another call
while a call is in progress.
Call
To switch between the two calls:
number.
Turning the Speakerphone on and off
While on a call, you can use your Speakerphone by following
these steps:
1.
Tap
Speaker
(Speaker off) to turn the speakerphone on.
2.
Tap
Speaker
(Speaker on) to turn the speakerphone off.
Tip: When the speaker is turned On, the color of the speaker is green. When
the speaker is turned Off, the color of the speaker is gray.
Call Functions and Contacts List
62
Muting a Call
1.
2.
Tap
Mute
Creating a Memo During a Call
(Mute off) to turn mute on so the other caller
1.
Press
Tap
2.
Use the keyboard to enter the note then tap Save.
Mute
(Mute on) to turn mute off and resume your
conversation.
Switching to Bluetooth Headset
1.
While on a call, switch to the Bluetooth headset instead of
speaker by tapping Headset.
2.
At the prompt, tap Yes to enable Bluetooth if it is not
already activated.
More In-call Options
During a call you can save the current caller’s information to the
Contacts list, or create a Memo.
Viewing the Contacts List
During a call you can look up a number in the Contacts list.
63
During a call it may be necessary to record information (a Note).
cannot hear you speaking.
1.
Press
and then tap Contacts.
2.
Browse the Contacts list for the information you need.
3.
Press
to return to the active call.
and then tap Memo.
• If desired, while creating your new memo, press
new memo background color before saving.
and select a
Automatic screen lock
If you configured your phone with the Automatic screen lock
option, during a call your screen locks to prevent accidental
screen presses. To temporarily unlock the screen press the lock
key (on the right side of the phone).
Multi-Party calls
Making a Multi-Party Call
A multi-party call is a network service that allows up to six
people to participate in a multi-party or conference call.
For further details about subscribing to this service, contact
T-Mobile customer service.
Setting up a Multi-Party Call
Having a Private Conversation With One Participant
1.
From the Home screen, tap
2.
Dial the number for the first participant and tap
3.
Tap Add call, enter the second phone number and
tap
4.
Call
.
Call
.
. The first caller is placed on hold.
Wait for the second caller to answer the incoming call and
tap Join. The two calls are now joined into a multi-party
When you have two participants
in a multi-party session, you
might be necessary to place
one of those participants on
hold so that a private
conversation can be held with a
single caller. While you are in a
multi-party call:
Manage Conference Call
call and display in the order in which they were called.
Important!: A maximum of two callers can be joined to a single multi-party
line. Additional callers participate in a new Multiparty session
and held in conjunction with the previous multiparty call. You can
swap or place each multi-party call on hold.
Call Functions and Contacts List
64
1.
Press
and then tap Manage Conference Call.
4.
Tap the Manage Conference Call image shown on page 64.
2.
Tap
To return to the multi-party call, tap the Join icon. All of the
multi-party call participants can now hear each other.
– or –
adjacent to the participants you would like to
Dropping One Participant
1.
Press
and then tap Manage Conference Call.
– or –
split from the current call. The list displays the callers in
Tap the Manage Conference Call image shown on page 64.
the order they were dialed.
2.
Tap End to the right of the number to drop.
The participant is disconnected and you can continue the
Split
Caller
End
Call
call with the other participant.
3.
Tap
to end the current call.
Call Waiting
Return
to Call
3.
Tap the number for the participant in which you want to
speak privately. You can now talk privately to that person
while the other participants can continue to converse with
each other. If there is only one other participant, that
person is placed on hold.
65
You can answer an incoming call while you have a call in
progress, if this service is supported by the network and you
must have previously set the Call waiting option to Activate.
You are notified of an incoming call by a call waiting tone. For
more information, refer to “Configuring Voice Calls” on
page 188.
To answer a new call while you have a call in progress:
1.
In a single motion, touch
Displays when a call was missed.
and slide it to the right to
answer the new incoming call.
Accessing the Call Logs Tab
Note: The new caller appears at the top of the list. The previous caller is
placed on hold and appears at the bottom of the list.
2.
Tap Swap to switch between the two calls. This places the
new caller on hold and activates the previous call. The
active call displays with a green background.
3.
➔ Call logs tab.
1.
From the Home screen, tap
2.
Tap an entry to view available options.
Note: The Call logs tab only records calls that occur while the phone is turned
on. If a call is received while it is turned off, it will not be included in
your calling history.
Tap Swap again to switch back.
Call Logs Tab
The Call logs tab is a list of the phone numbers (or Contacts
entries) for calls you placed, accepted, or missed. The Call logs
tab make redialing a number fast and easy. It is continually
updated as your device automatically adds new numbers to the
beginning of the list and removes the oldest entries from the
bottom of the list.
The Notification area of the Home screen (upper-left) displays
phone notifications, status, or alerts such as:
Each entry contains the phone number (if it is available) and
Contacts entry name (if the number is in your Contacts).
Indicates all outgoing calls made from your device.
Indicates any received calls that were answered.
Indicates a missed call.
Displays when a call is in progress.
Call Functions and Contacts List
66
Accessing Call Logs from The Notifications Area
1.
Locate
2.
Tap the Status bar to reveal the Notifications tab, and then
Call Logs - Caller Overview
from the Notifications area of the Status bar.
Call options (tap)
drag the tab to the bottom of the screen to open the
Notifications panel (1).
3.
Tap the Missed call entry to open the Logs screen (2).
Tip: Press
and tap Notifications to open the panel.
This list provides easy access to redial an entry, or you can also
choose to access two types of history entry lists depending on
how they are touched.
67
Call Log screen
Entry-specific
context menu
(touch and hold)
• Tap a contact entry name or number to reveal the call options screen:
• Call allows you to redial the entry by name or number.
• Send message allows you to create a new text message to the
selected entry.
• Send email allows you to create a new email that is then
addressed to the entry’s available email address.
• Time provides the time and date of the call and its duration.
• Add to Contacts to save the number if it is not already in your
Contacts.
• Touch and hold an entry to display the entry-specific context menu:
• Call [Number] to redial the current phone number.
• Send message allows you to create a new text message to the
selected entry.
• Edit number before call to make alterations to the current phone
number prior to redial.
• Add to Contacts to save the number if it is not already in your
Contacts.
• View contact to view the information for the currently stored
Contacts entry.
• Send contact information to send the Log entry information via
text message.
• Add to reject list to add the current phone number to an automatic
rejection list. Similar to a block list, the selected caller will be
blocked from making an incoming calls to your phone.
• Delete to delete the entry from the Logs list.
Altering Numbers from the Call Log
If you need to make a call from the Call logs screen and you need
to alter the number prior to dialing, you can add the appropriate
prefix by prepending the number.
➔ Call logs tab.
1.
From the Home screen, tap
2.
Touch and hold an entry to access the entry-specific
context menu.
3.
Tap Edit number before call.
4.
Edit the number using the on-screen dialpad or delete
digits by pressing
5.
Tap
Call
to erase the numbers.
once the number has been changed.
Call Functions and Contacts List
68
Erasing the Call Log
Viewing Missed Calls from Lock Screen
You can delete either an individual call log entry or all current
entries from the Call logs list.
To clear a single entry from the list:
➔ Call logs tab.
1.
From the Home screen, tap
2.
Touch and hold an entry and select Delete.
To clear all entries from the list:
1.
From the Home screen, tap
2.
Press
3.
Tap Select all ➔ Delete ➔ OK.
➔ Delete.
➔ Call logs tab.
When you are unable to answer
a call for any reason and your
screen is locked, the number of
missed calls are displayed on
the Lock screen immediately
after a call is missed.
To view a missed call
immediately:
1.
Press
to reactive
the screen.
2.
Touch and drag the
puzzle piece (with the
number of missed calls
on it) to the area where
the piece is missing.
The Call logs tab is then displayed.
69
Section 5: Entering Text
This section describes how to select the desired text input method
when entering characters into your phone. This section also
describes the predictive text entry system that reduces the
amount of key strokes associated with entering text.
Your phone comes equipped with an orientation detector that can
tell if the phone is being held in an upright (Portrait) or sideways
Selecting the Text Input Method
The Text Input Method can be assigned from within one of two
locations:
Settings Menu:
䊳
Press
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔ Locale
and text ➔ Select input method.
(Landscape) orientation. This is useful when entering text.
Your phone also provides several on-screen keypad text entry
options to make the task of text entry that much easier.
Text Input field:
1.
Text Input Methods
There are two text input methods available:
• Samsung Keypad: an on-screen QWERTY keypad that can be
used in both portrait and landscape orientation.
• Swype (default): a new way to enter text on touch screens.
Instead of tapping each key, use your finger to trace over each
letter of a word.
From a screen where you can enter text, touch and hold
the text input field to open the context-menu.
2.
Select the desired input method (Samsung keypad or
Swype).
The on-screen QWERTY keypad works the same in both portrait
and landscape mode.
Default Text
Input Method
Entering Text
70
Using the Swype Keyboard
SWYPE Settings
Swype™ is the default text input method that allows you to enter
a word by sliding your finger or stylus from letter to letter, lifting
your finger between words. SWYPE uses error correcting
algorithms and a language model to predict the next word.
SWYPE also includes a touch predictive text system.
Enabling and Configuring SWYPE
If you configure another text input method (Samsung keypad) you
must re-enable SWYPE before using the SWYPE keyboard.
When SWYPE is enabled there is no normal keyboard
functionality.
1.
Press
➔
and then tap
and text.
2.
Tap Select input method ➔ Swype.
(Settings) ➔ Locale
To configure Swype settings:
1.
Press
➔
and then tap
➔ Locale and text
➔ Swype.
2.
Locate the Preferences section to alter these settings:
• Language: allows you to select the current text input language.
Default language is US English.
• Audio feedback: turns on sounds generated by the Swype
application.
• Vibrate on keypress: activates a vibration sensation as you enter
text using the keypad.
• Show tips: turns on a flashing indicator for quick help.
3. Locate the Swype Advanced Settings section to alter these
settings:
• Word suggestion: predicts words as you are typing.
• Auto-spacing: automatically inserts a space between words.
When you finish a word, just lift your finger or stylus and start the
next word.
• Auto-capitalization: automatically capitalizes the first letter of a
sentence.
• Show complete trace: selects whether to display the complete
Swype path.
71
• Speed vs. accuracy: sets how quickly Swype responds to
on-screen input. Move the slider between Fast Response (speed)
or Error Tolerannce (accuracy) and tap OK.
• Personal dictionary: helps you manage your personal Swype
dictionary.
• Reset Swype’s dictionary: deletes all previous words you have
added to Swype’s dictionary.
4. Locate the Help section to alter these settings:
• Swype help: allows you to view the on-line user manual for Swype.
• Tutorial: a short tutorial that helps you to get started using Swype.
5. Locate the About section to review the Swype application
information:
• Version: lists the Swype version number.
Swype Text Entry Tips
You can access the SwypeTips application and watch a video or
tutorial on using Swype. You can also use the following Swype
text entry tips.
• Create a squiggle (like an S shape) to create a double letter (such as
pp in apple).
• Touch and hold a key to view the punctuation menu then make a
selection.
• Move your finger or stylus over the apostrophe to enter contractions.
• Double-touch on the word you want to change to correct a misspelled
word, then touch the delete key to erase one character. Touch and hold
the delete key to erase an entire word.
Selecting a Text Input Mode in Swype
1.
From a screen where you can enter text, tap the text input
field to reveal the on-screen keyboard.
2.
With Swype as your text entry method, select one of the
following text mode options:
• 123ABC Mode: activates the default alphabetic keys. Press the
Shift key to toggle between Abc, ABC, or abc. When in this mode,
the input type button shows 123 .
SYM
• Symbol/Numeric Mode: activates the number, symbol, and
emoticon keys. When in this mode, the input type button shows
123
ABC
Note: When in Abc mode, the Sym key displays. When in Sym mode, the ABC
key displays.
Note: After typing an initial uppercase character, the
and all letters that follow are in lower case.
key changes to
Entering Text
72
Swype Keyboard Overview
• Recipients: a field where you can enter the recipients of the current
message. You can choose from Recent, Contacts, or Group.
• Text Input field: a field where text, number, or other characters can be
entered.
• CAPS/ALT key: When in 123ABC mode, this key changes the
capitalization of the subsequent entered characters. When in SYM
mode, this key can show additional symbol characters.
• Text Input mode: There are two available modes: 123ABC and
123SYM.
– 123ABC mode contains alphanumeric characters and a few common
punctuation marks. Text mode button indicates 123SYM.
– SYM mode contains only symbols and numbers. Text mode button
indicates 123ABC.
• SWYPE tips: Tapping this button displays the Swype tips and tutorial
screen.
To enter text via Swype:
For example, if you were going to enter the word “guys”. Put your
finger down on the “g”, and without lifting, glide it to the “u”, and
then to the “y”, and then over to the “s”. When complete, lift your
finger off the screen to allow the device to determine the closest
word match.
73
Note: If multiple word choices exist for your Swype entry, an on-screen
popup appears to provide additional word choices.
Recipients
Text input field
Word
suggestions
Current Mode
CAPS/ALT
key
Delete
SWYPE Tips
Text Input mode
Voice actions
Using Abc Mode in Swype
1.
Initial Uppercase
From within an active text entry screen, rotate the phone
counterclockwise to a landscape orientation, if desired.
The following screen displays:
2.
Tap
123
ABC
to configure the keyboard for ABC mode. Once
in this mode, the text input type shows
Note: After typing an initial uppercase character, the
and all letters that follow are in lower case.
3.
123
SYM
.
Displays when the initial character is entered as
uppercase but all subsequent characters are
lowercase.
All Uppercase
Displays when all characters will be entered as
uppercase characters.
key changes to
Swipe your finger continuously over the letters to form a
word.
By default, the first letter of an entry is capitalized and the
following letters are lower case. After a word is entered and you
lift your finger, the cursor automatically adds a space after the
word.
• If you make a mistake, tap
to erase a single character.
Touch and hold
to erase an entire word.
4.
Tap Send to deliver the message.
All lowercase
Displays when the next character is entered in
lowercase.
Entering Text
74
Entering Numbers and Symbols in Swype
By using the onscreen keyboard in portrait mode, some symbols
are not available (such as Emoticons or Smileys). In SYM mode
using Swype, you can only enter symbols and numbers from the
onscreen keyboard. Once in SYM mode, the text mode key shows
123 .
ABC
1. 1. From a screen where you can enter text, tap the text
input field to reveal the on-screen keyboard.
123
2.
Tap SYM to configure the keyboard for SYM mode. Once
123
in this mode, the text input type shows ABC .
3.
Tap the on-screen key for the number or symbol you want
to enter.
4.
Touch and hold an on-screen key to enter the secondary
symbol (above the main one on the same key).
5.
Tap
to choose from additional symbols.
For example:
• To enter &: tap 123SYM and select the & key.
• To enter ~ tap 123SYM and draw a circle over the & key.
- or ➔ & key.
To enter ~ tap 123SYM ➔
75
Using the Samsung QWERTY Keypad
This QWERTY keypad can be used to enter text in either a Portrait
or landscape orientation. The only difference between the two
orientations are the sizes of the keys.
From a screen where you enter text, rotate your phone
counterclockwise to a landscape orientation. The on-screen
QWERTY keypad displays.
The Samsung Keypad
– or –
This device has a built-in, QWERTY keypad (portrait mode) or
keyboard (landscape mode). Using the QWERTY keypad/
keyboard, you can type letter, numbers, punctuation, and other
characters.
To use the Samsung keypad you must first configure the settings
to default to the Samsung keypad.
1.
Press
➔
and then tap
From a screen where you can enter text, tap and hold the
text input field and tap Input method ➔ Samsung keypad.
2.
The virtual keyboard is then assigned to the Samsung
keypad configuration for all subsequent text input.
Text input field
Suggested Words
(Settings) ➔ Locale
and text ➔ Select input method ➔ Samsung keypad.
Shift key
Input Mode
Indicator
Current Mode
Settings Emoticons
Entering Text
76
Changing the QWERTY Input Type
1.
Initial Uppercase
From a screen where you can enter text, tap the text input
With Samsung keypad as your text entry method, select
Displays when the initial character is entered as
uppercase but all subsequent characters are
lowercase.
one of the following text mode options:
All Uppercase
• Abc Mode ABC to use alphabetic characters from the
Displays when all characters will be entered as
uppercase characters.
field to reveal the on-screen keyboard.
2.
on-screen keyboard. In this mode, the text mode button displays
?123 . Tap the Shift key to toggle between Abc, ABC, or abc.
• Symbol/Numeric Mode ?123 : to enter numbers by pressing the
numbers selecting them on the onscreen keyboard. In this mode,
the text mode button displays ABC .
Note: After typing an initial uppercase character, tap
capitalization.
to toggle the
All lowercase
Displays when the next character is entered in
lowercase.
77
By default, the first letter of a new entry is capitalized and the
following letters are lowercased. After a character is entered, the
cursor automatically advances to the next space.
Using Abc Mode
1.
Using Symbol/Numeric Mode
From a screen where you can enter text, tap the text input
field to reveal the on-screen keyboard.
2.
Tap ABC to configure the keyboard for ABC mode. Once
in this mode, the text input type shows ?123 .
Use the Symbol/Numeric Mode to add numbers, symbols, or
emoticons. While in this mode, the text mode key displays
ABC .
1.
From a screen where you can enter text, tap the text input
field to reveal the on-screen keyboard. Rotate the phone
Note: After typing an initial uppercase character, the
and all letters that follow are in lower case.
key changes to
counterclockwise to a landscape orientation, if desired.
2.
3.
Enter your text using the on-screen keyboard.
mode.Once in this mode, the text input type shows ABC .
The following screen displays:
• If you make a mistake, tap
to erase a single character.
Touch and hold
to erase an entire word.
4.
Tap ?123 to configure the keyboard for Symbol
Tap Send to deliver the message.
3.
Tap a number, symbol, or emoticon character.
Entering Text
78
4.
Tap ABC to return to ABC mode.
2.
3.
To enter symbols:
Tap the XT9 advanced settings and configure any of the
5.
Tap ?123 to configure the keyboard for Symbol mode.
following advanced options:
6.
Tap the appropriate symbol key.
• Word completion tells your device to attempt to predict how to
complete the word you have started. (A green check mark indicates
the feature is enabled.)
• Word completion point sets how many letters should be entered
before a word prediction is made. Choose from 2 letters, 3 letters,
4 letters, or 5 letters.
• Spell correction enables the automatic correction of typographical
errors by selecting from a list of possible words that reflect both the
characters of the keys you touched, and those of nearby
characters. (A green check mark indicates the feature is enabled.)
• Next word prediction predicts the next word you are like to enter.
(A green check mark indicates the feature is enabled.)
• Auto-append automatically adds predictions to the word you are
typing. (A green check mark indicates the feature is enabled.)
• Auto-substitution allows the device to automatically replace
misspelled or miskeyed words. This option reduce “typos.” (A green
check mark indicates the feature is enabled.)
• Regional correction automatically tries to correct errors caused
when you tap keys adjacent to the correct keys. (A green check
mark indicates the feature is enabled.
• Recapture sets the device to redisplay the word suggestion list
after selecting the wrong word from the list.
– or –
Tap 1/3 button to cycle through additional pages.
• The first number on this key indicates which page (1, 2, or 3) of
additional characters is active.
Using XT9 Predictive Text
XT9 is a predictive text system that has next-letter prediction and
regional error correction, which compensates for users pressing
the wrong keys on QWERTY keyboards.
Note: XT9 is only available when ABC mode is selected. XT9 advanced
settings are available only if the XT9 field has been selected.
1.
Press
➔
and then tap
➔ Locale and text
➔ Samsung keypad.
– or –
From within an active text entry screen, tap
at the
bottom of the screen to access the Samsung keypad
settings screen.
79
Tap the XT9 field. A checkmark indicates activation.
• XT9 my words allows you to add new words to the built-in XT9
dictionary.
– Tap Add word.
– Use the Register to XT9 my words field to enter the new word.
– Tap Done to store the new word.
• XT9 auto-substitution allows you create a word rule by adding
words for automatic substitution during text entry (for example
youve becomes you’ve).
– Tap the XT9 auto-substitution field. Flick up or down to review the
current list of word substitutions.
– Press
and tap Add.
– Enter the original word that will be replaced in the Shortcut field (for
example, youve).
– Enter the substitute word that will be used in the Substitution field (for
example, you?fve).
– Tap Done to save the substitution rule.
4. Press
to return to the previous screen.
Entering Text
80
Section 6: Contacts
This section explains how to use and manage your Contacts List.
You can save phone numbers to your phone’s memory.
4.
accounts area, tap
Accounts
next to the account you
From the Accounts menu you decide if you want applications to
synchronize, send, and receive data at any given time, or if you
want the applications to synchronize automatically. After
determining how you want the accounts to synchronize, indicate
which account to synchronize with your Contacts list.
1.
Sign in to your Google account.
2.
Press
➔
and then tap
Tap Add account to create
a new account.
Tap an account type to
add.
6.
Follow the on-screen
instructions. The selected
and then tap
Settings ➔ Accounts and sync.
From the General sync settings section, touch one of the
following options:
• Background data: allows your phone to use data in the
background.
• Auto-sync: automatically synchronizes your data with the phone.
81
– or –
(Settings) ➔
– or –
From the Home screen, press
want to synchronize.
5.
Accounts and sync.
3.
From the Manage
account type
synchronizes with your Contacts list.
Contacts List
Creating a Contact
The default storage location for
saving phone numbers to your
Contacts List is your phone’s
built-in memory.
If existing Google and Corporate
email accounts have been
synchronized to your phone,
these will be made available to
your device during the creation
of new entries. These new
Contacts entries can be
assigned or saved to synced
accounts such as Phone, SIM,
Google, or Corporate.
Your phone automatically sorts the Contacts entries
alphabetically. You can create either a Phone, SIM, T-Mobile
Contacts Backup, Google, or Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync
contact.
Note: Before you can save a contact to the Phone, Contact settings must be
set to Save new contacts to Phone.
Note: If the phone is ever reset to its factory default parameters, contacts
stored on the phone can be lost.
• SIM contacts are stored within the SIM Card.
Note: SIM contacts only store the Name and Phone number for an entry.
• T-Mobile Contacts Backup contacts are stored remotely on the
T-Mobile servers and can later be retrieved even if your phone has
been damaged or reset.
• Google contacts are shared with your existing Google account and can
also be imported to your phone after you have created a Google Mail
account.
• Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync (also known as Work or Outlook)
contacts are those contacts that are intended to be shared with either
an Exchange Server or from within Microsoft® Outlook®.
Note: When storing an entry into your SIM card, note that only the Name, and
Number are saved. To save additional information for a particular
contact, such as notes, email, dates, etc., it is important to save that
Contact into your phone’s onboard memory.
1.
From the Home screen, tap
2.
Tap
(Contacts).
to create a contact.
• Phone contacts are stored locally on the device.
Contacts
82
Note: You can also add a new contact by entering a number from the keypad
(Create
and pressing
and then tap Add to Contacts ➔
contact). Continue with step 3.
3.
7.
• Tap
on the QWERTY keyboard to remove a previously
entered phone number.
Tap a destination type (Phone, SIM, T-Mobile Contacts
backup, Google, or Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync)
(depending on where you want to save the new contact
8.
Tap the First name and Last name fields, and enter a name
for this contact using the displayed keypad.
5.
Tap the image icon and select a photo for this contact.
Selections are: Album, or Take photo.
6.
Tap the label button (to the left of the Phone number field)
to select a category such as Mobile (default), Home, Work,
Work fax, Home fax, Pager, Other, Custom, or Callback.
Note: These labels entries can change and are dependant on the selected
destination type (ex: Callback might not appear with a Google account
destination type).
83
• Tap
to enter an additional phone number
• Tap
to remove a previously entered phone number.
Enter additional information such as: Email, IM, Groups,
Ringtone, Postal address, Organization or More fields to
information).
4.
Tap a phone number field and enter a phone number.
input additional category information.
• The More field contains the following options: Notes, Nickname,
Website, Internet call, Birthday, and Anniversary.
• Use your finger to slide the page up or down to see additional fields
and categories.
9. Tap Save to complete and store the new entry.
To save a Number from your Keypad:
1.
From the Home screen, tap
2.
Enter a phone number using the on-screen dialpad.
(Phone).
3.
Tap Add to Contacts ➔
(Create contact) or select the
Contact entry from the on-screen list.
– or –
Press
and then tap Add to Contacts ➔
(Create
contact) or select the Contact entry from the on-screen list.
• If you're updating an existing contact, tap the entry from the list and
proceed to step 5.
4. Tap a destination type (Phone, SIM, T-Mobile Contacts
backup, Google, or Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync).
(depending on where you want to save the new contact
information).
5.
Tap the label button (to the left of the Phone number field)
to select a category such as Mobile (default), Home, Work,
Work fax, Home fax, Pager, Other, Custom, or Callback.
Note: These labels entries can change and are dependant on the selected
destination type (ex: Callback might not appear with a Google account
destination type).
7.
Finding a Contact
You can store phone numbers and their corresponding names
onto either your SIM card, your phone’s built-in memory, or an
external location (such as Google, Exchange, or T-Mobile
Backup). They are all physically separate but are used as a single
entity, called Contacts.
Depending on the storage size of the particular SIM card, the
maximum number of phone numbers the card can store may
differ.
1.
From the Home screen, tap
2.
Swipe up or down until you see the contact displayed.
Tap the First name and Last name fields, and enter a name
for this contact.
6.
Note: For further details about how to enter characters, see “Text Input
Methods” on page 70.
(Contacts).
– or –
Tap the Search contacts field and begin entering the entry’s
name. Matching entries are then displayed. This process
filters through all of your current account Contact entries to
only show you the matching entries.
– or –
Tap Save to complete and store the new entry.
Contacts
84
In a single motion, touch and hold the letter tab area (on
1.
From the Home screen, tap
the list. You are then taken to that section of the Contacts
2.
Tap a contact name from the list.
3.
Press
list. Touch the contact entry.
Create
Contact
.
and select Edit.
Note: You can also access an entry’s context menu by touching and holding
an entry then tapping Edit.
Tabs
Search
Contacts
field
Contacts
Tabbed
Navigation
85
Editing Contact Information
the right) until on-screen letters appear, then scroll through
4.
Edit the contact information then tap Save.
Context
Menu
Adding a Number to an Existing Contact
1.
From the Home screen, tap
2.
Touch and hold an entry
.
and select Edit to reveal
the Contact entry’s
Deleting Contacts
details screen (page 88).
3.
• The More field contains the following options: Notes, Nickname,
Website, Internet call, Birthday, and Anniversary.
• Use your finger to slide the page up or down to see additional fields
and categories.
5. Tap Save to complete and store the new entry.
This option allows you to delete your contacts. You can delete all
your entries from your phone’s memory, your SIM card, FDN, or
All.
Tap a phone number field
and enter a phone
number.
Important!: Once Contacts List entries are deleted, they cannot be recovered.
• Tap
on the
QWERTY keyboard to
remove a previously
entered phone number.
• Tap
to enter an
additional phone number
From the Home screen, tap
.
2.
Touch and hold a contact name from the list and select
Delete ➔ OK.
Contact Details Screen
• Tap
to remove a
previously entered phone number.
4.
1.
Enter additional information such as: Email, IM, Ringtone,
Postal address, Organization or More fields to input
Contact List Options
1.
From the Home screen, tap
2.
Press
.
. The following options display:
• Create contact: allows you to create a new Contact entry.
• Delete: allows you to delete 1 or more of your contacts.
additional category information.
Contacts
86
• Display options: You can choose to only display contacts that have
phone numbers, sort by first or last name, display contacts first
name first or last name first, display contacts stored to your SIM
card, display contacts stored on your phone, and/or display
contacts stored to other accounts.
• Import/Export: imports or exports contacts to or from the SIM card
or microSD card.
• Get friends: allows you to get contacts from your friends on
Facebook, Twitter, or MySpace. You can also get contacts from
Corporate or Google accounts.
• More:
– Accounts: allows you to add and manage mobile accounts on
Facebook, Twitter, or MySpace. You can also add Corporate or Google
accounts.
– Speed dial: allows you to set up speed-dialing.
– Send email: allows you to send an email using your Google account.
– Send message: allows you to send a text or picture message.
– My profile: allows you to set up a profile for yourself. The information
will be the same that you can add for a new contact.
– Settings: allows you to configure where you save new contacts, or view
your Own numbers, or Service numbers.
87
Contact Menu Options
1.
From the Home screen,
tap
2.
.
Touch and hold an entry to
reveal the context menu.
The following options
display:
• Edit: allows you to edit the
currently selected Contacts
entry.
• Delete: allows you to delete the
currently selected Contacts
entry.
• Join contact: allows you to link
the current contact to another current contact. Similar to a “see
also” feature. If you can’t remember a contact’s information, linking
entries can help you find the person you are looking for.
• Send contact information: allows you to send the current entry
info via text message.
• Add to favorites: allows you to copy the current Contacts entry to
the list within the Favorites tab.
• Remove from favorites: allows you to remove the current Contacts
entry from the Favorites tab.
• Add to group: allows you to add the current Contacts entry to an
existing group.
• Mark as default: allows you to assign default numbers, email, etc..
for a selected Contact. For more information, refer to “Marking a
Contact as Default” on page 90.
• Send namecard via: allows you to send the current Contact entry’s
information to an external recipient via either Bluetooth, Email
(Exchange or Internet), Gmail, or Messaging.
Contact Entry Options
1.
From the Home screen,
tap
2.
.
Touch an entry to reveal the
Screen. This screen contains
Name, contact numbers,
email, and linked contact
information.
Press
entry.
Tap an available option.
This device can synchronize with multiple accounts (such as
Facebook, Twitter, MySpace, Microsoft Exchange, Google, or
T-Mobile). When you synchronize your phone with those
accounts, each account creates a separate contact entry in the
Contacts list.
Joining contact information makes sending messages easy. You
can select any account email address or information all from one
screen, versus searching multiple, individual screens to locate
the desired account information.
to reveal the
context menu specific to this
4.
Most people now maintain multiple email accounts, social
networking logins, and other similar account information. For
example, a Facebook account login name might differ from a
corporate email account login because they are maintained
separately and for different groups of people.
If one of your contacts (Amy Smith) has a regular email account
that you maintain in Gmail, but also has a Facebook account
under her maiden and married name, as well as a Video! chat
account, when you merge those accounts into your Contacts list
you can join all of her entries and view the information in one
record.
Contact entry’s Overview
3.
Joining Contact Information
Contact Overview Screen
Contacts
88
Next time you synchronize your phone with your accounts, any
updates contacts make to email account names, email
addresses, etc. automatically update in your contacts list.
For more information about synchronizing accounts, see “Get
Friends” on page 93.
1.
From the Home screen, tap
.
2.
Tap a contact name (the name you want to link to another
Important!: It is the second contact image that is displayed for both buy the
first contact’s name that is used.
For example: If Amy (original entry) is joined with Julie (second
entry). Julie appears to disappear and only Amy remains. Tap the
Amy entry (showing the Julie image) to view both.
5.
Touch the main linked contact to view the contact
information you linked. The contacts and information
displays with an icon next to the contact name to indicate
entry).
what type of account information is contained in the entry.
Note: Typically this is the same contact with a different name or account
information.
3.
Press
and then tap Join contact.
4.
Tap the second contact entry (the entry in which to link).
Unjoining a Contact
1.
From the Home screen, tap
2.
Tap a contact name (the account name from which you
.
want to unjoin an entry). This reveals the details for entry.
The second contact is now linked with the first and the
account information is merged into one screen.
Note: The information is still maintained in both entries, but displays in one
record for easier viewing when you link the contacts.
Note: Typically this is the same contact with a different name or account
information.
3.
Tap the Joined contacts area.
4.
Tap
next to the entry you want to unjoin. The
contacts are “unjoined” or separated and no longer display
in the merged record screen. Both contacts now go back to
being separately displayed.
89
Sending a Namecard
Marking a Contact as Default
When you use applications such as the Voice Dialer or other
messaging type applications, the application needs to know
which information is primary (default) in a contact entry list. For
example, when you say “Call John Smith”, if you have three
phone records for John Smith, the Voice dialer is looking for the
“default” number or entry.
The Mark as default option marks one entry in a contact record to
use as the default. This comes in handy when you have multiple
entries for the same person (see Linked contacts).
1.
From the Home screen, tap
2.
Tap a Contact entry.
3.
Press
1.
From the Home screen, tap
2.
Tap a Contact entry.
3.
Press
and then tap Mark as default. The Mark as
and then tap Send via and select a delivery
The Namecard attaches to the selected message type and
is delivered when you send the message.
Sending All Current Namecards
Rather than selecting once Contact entry at a time, you can send
all of your current entries at once.
name, phone number, or other contact information.
1.
From the Home screen, tap
Tap the radio button next to the entry information you want
2.
Press
to be the primary information (such as name, phone
number, or email) and select Save.
.
method: Bluetooth, Email, Gmail, or Messaging.
.
default screen displays radio buttons next to the contact
4.
A Namecard contains contact information, and can be sent to
recipients as a Virtual Business Card (V-card) attachment using
Bluetooth, Google Mail, or as a message.
.
and then tap Import/Export ➔ Send namecard
via.
3.
Tap Select all to place a check mark alongside all currently
displayed Contact entries.
Contacts
90
4.
Tap Send and select a delivery method:
• Bluetooth to transmit this contact to another bluetooth-compatible
device.
• Email to attach the contact card to a new outgoing email (Exchange
or Internet).
• Gmail to attach the contact card to a new outgoing Internet-based
email.
• Messaging to attach the contact card to a new outgoing text
message.
Sending a namecard using Bluetooth
You must create a Contact prior to sending a namecard to a
recipient. For more information, refer to “Creating a Contact” on
page 82.
The default storage location for saving phone numbers to your
Contacts list is your phone’s built-in memory. This procedure
allows you to copy numbers saved to the phone’s memory, onto
the SIM card.
Note: These must be contacts stored on the phone. External entries (Google,
Exchange, etc...) can not be transferred in this manner.
1.
From the Home screen, tap
2.
From the Contacts List, press
.
and then tap
Import/Export ➔ Export to SIM card.
From the Home screen, tap
2.
Touch and hold the entry to reveal the on-screen context
– or –
menu.
Select a specific entry by touching an entry. A check mark
Tap Send namecard via ➔ Bluetooth.
indicates a selection.
Important!: You must activate Bluetooth to use this feature.
4.
Tap the Bluetooth device in which to send this name card.
Bluetooth forwards the namecard to the recipient.
91
Copying Contact Information to the SIM Card
1.
3.
.
Copying Contact Information
3.
4.
Tap Select all to choose all current phone contact entries.
Tap Export. The name and phone number for the selected
contact is then copied to the SIM.
Copying Contact Information to the microSD Card
This procedure allows you to copy entry information saved on the
phone’s memory, onto the SIM card.
1.
From the Home screen, tap
2.
From the Contacts List, press
.
and then tap
Import/Export ➔ Export to SD card.
3.
Tap OK to choose all current phone contact entries.
Synchronizing Contacts
Syncing data from your managed accounts allows you to add and
manage a new or existing contact from your online or remote
accounts to your phone. Prior to syncing, you must first have an
active Google or Microsoft Exchange account with current
Contact entries, and be signed into your account via the phone.
With syncing, any Contacts entries (with phone numbers, email
addresses, pictures, etc.) are updated and synced with your
phone. For more information about syncing existing managed
accounts, see “Accounts and Synchronization” on page 201.
1.
Press
➔
and then tap
➔ Accounts and
sync.
2.
Locate the email account containing the contacts you wish
to synchronize.
3.
Tap
within the adjacent account field to reveal the
account’s synchronization settings screen.
4.
To synchronize Contacts, tap Sync Contacts. A green
checkmark indicates the feature is enabled.
Note: The process of updating your Contacts tab can take several minutes. If
after 10-20 minutes, your list has not been updated, repeat step 2-3.
Contacts
92
5.
Your Contacts tab then reflects any updated Contact
information.
Note: Syncing of contacts requires you are logged into your Gmail and
Corporate accounts via the device.
Get Friends
Display Options
The Display options menu allows you to allows you to choose
whether to display contacts saved from the Phone, SIM, T-Mobile
Contacts Backup, external source, or all. You can also choose to
display only contacts that have phone numbers.
1.
2.
From the Home screen, tap
Press
• Choose contacts to display allows you to filter Contacts based on
category entries from within the locations such as: Phone, SIM,
T-Mobile Contacts Backup, Google, and Microsoft Exchange
ActiveSync.
3. Tap Done.
.
and then tap Display options. Configure any of
When you synchronize applications such as Facebook, Twitter,
MySpace, a corporate email account, or Google, using the Get
Friends option synchronizes the data from the selected account
type with your Contacts list.
1.
From the Home screen, tap
2.
Press
Add account.
the following options:
• Only contacts with phones allows you to display only those
contacts containing phone numbers.
• Sort by defines how the current list of Contacts are sorted: First
name or Last name.
• Display contacts by defines how the current list of Contacts are
listed: First name first (ex: Steve Smith) or Last name first (Smith,
Steve).
.
and then tap Get friends ➔ Add account ➔
3.
Determine which type of account information you want to
synchronize with your Contact list. Selections are:
Facebook, Twitter, MySpace, Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync,
Google, Facebook, Video Chat, or T-Mobile Contacts Backup.
4.
Tap an account type to add.
5.
Follow the prompts. The selected account type
synchronizes with your Contacts list.
93
6.
After synchronizing accounts you may want to link contact
information. For more information, refer to “Joining
Contact Information” on page 88.
To add Facebook content to your Contacts list:
You can now add your Facebook contact information, such as
pictures, email, and phone numbers directly to your Contacts list.
All of their current contact information is then migrated over to
your phone. If a Contacts entry already exists with a slightly
different name, separate entries are created and can later be
linked (joined) together into a single entry.
Important!: This process not only synchronizes your contact information but
also your status, events, and more.
1.
Log into your Facebook account:
• From the Home screen, tap
(Facebook).
Tap those contact settings you wish to synchronize (all are
enabled by default). A green circle indicates the feature is
enabled.
4.
From the Home screen, tap
to confirm your
Facebook contacts are now synchronized and appear in
your Contacts list.
To resync Social Network Contacts:
1.
From the Home screen, tap
2.
Press
➔ Contacts tab.
and then tap Sync SNS data.
My Profile
You can send this Virtual Business Card (V-card) to other contacts
as an attachment. My Profile is the first Contact listed in the
Contacts list.
(Applications) ➔
• Enter your account’s access Email and Password information and
tap Login.
2.
• Choose from: Sync all, Sync with existing contacts, or Don’t
sync.
3. Tap Finish to complete the login and sync process.
Note: As with any profile, your profile can be associated with a group.
To create My Profile:
1.
From the Home screen, tap
.
2.
Press
3.
Enter information into the various fields.
4.
Tap Save to store the new entry.
and then tap More ➔ My profile.
Contacts
94
Export/Import
To edit My Profile:
1.
With My profile displayed, press
and then tap Edit.
2.
Modify any of the information contained in My Profile, then
Contact List Settings
tap Save.
Additional Contact Options
From this menu you can determine the default storage location
for Contacts, display you phone’s primary number, and view
service numbers listed in your Contact list.
Sending an Email to a Contact
Note: Contacts must contain and email account and address before you can
use the Send email feature.
1.
From the Home screen, tap
2.
Press
.
and then tap More ➔ Send email. Contacts that
contain an email address display.
3.
Tap the contact to which you want to send an email. A
check mark displays next to the selection.
Note: The select contact must have an email as part of their details screen.
95
For more information, refer to “Copying Contact Information” on
page 91.
4.
Tap Add.
5.
Select an email account type.
6.
Compose the email and tap Send.
1.
From the Home screen, tap
2.
Press
.
3.
Select one of the following options:
and then tap More ➔ Settings.
• Save new contacts to: defines the default storage location of new
Contacts. Choose from: Always ask, Phone, SIM, T-Mobile
Contacts Backup, Google, or Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync.
• Own numbers: displays the number for this device.
• Service numbers: displays the list of Service Dialing Numbers
(SDN) assigned by your service provider. These numbers include
emergency numbers, customer service numbers and directory
inquiries.
Groups
Removing an Entry From a Caller Group
This feature allows you to add a new or existing contact to a call
group. This group can be one of the already present groups
(Family, Friends, or Work) or a user-created group.
Creating a New Caller Group
➔ Groups tab.
1.
From the Home screen, tap
2.
Press
3.
Tap the Group name field and use the on-screen keypad to
2.
Touch a group entry.
3.
Press
4.
Tap all of the contacts you want to remove from this group.
and then tap Remove member.
A checkmark displays next to contact entry.
“Text Input Methods” on page 70.
Tap Ringtone and select a ringtone for the group.
Selections are: Default ringtone, Sound, or Phone Ringtone.
5.
From the Home screen, tap
and then tap Create.
enter a new group name. For more information, refer to
4.
➔ Groups tab.
1.
Tap Save to store the newly created group
Adding an Existing Entry to a Current Caller Group
➔ Groups tab.
1.
From the Home screen, tap
2.
Tap a group entry ➔
3.
From the list of contacts, tap the contact(s) you want to
5.
Tap Remove.The contacts are removed from the group.
Editing a Caller Group
To edit a Group entry, there must be at least one member as part
of the selected group.
➔ Groups tab.
1.
From the Home screen, tap
2.
Touch a group entry.
3.
Press
4.
Make modifications to the Group name or Ringtone fields.
and then tap Edit group.
For more information, refer to “Creating a New Caller
(Add member).
Group” on page 96.
5.
Tap Save.
add. A checkmark displays next to contact entry.
4.
Tap Add. The selected contacts are added to the group.
Contacts
96
The History Tab
Sending a Message to a Group
1.
From the Home screen, tap
2.
Tap an existing group,
and press
and then
tap Send message.
3.
Select the recipients of
the new message
➔ Groups tab.
The History tab is a list of the phone numbers that have been
received, missed, and returned. For more information, refer to
“Call Logs Tab” on page 66.
1.
From the Home screen, tap
2.
Tap the History tab.
3.
Press
checkmark). If an entry
contains multiple phone
numbers, each must be
selected individually.
Tap Send.
5.
Type your message, and
tap Send.
. The following options are available:
• Delete: allows you to delete calls or messages from History. Select
a call or message and tap Delete.
• View by: allows you to select the type of displayed calls, messages,
or emails. Selections are: Call, Message, Email, Facebook,
MySpace, Twitter, or Select all. Touch the items you want to display
then tap Done.
(indicated by a green
4.
.
The Updates Tab
From the Updates tab you can view updated contact information
that were synchronized with Facebook, Myspace, or Twitter.
1.
From the Home screen, tap
.
Note: You must log in to an SNS account (Facebook, Myspace or Twitter)
before you can view the Updates.
2.
97
Tap the Updates tab. The updates display.
Section 7: Messages
This section describes how to send or receive different types of
messages. It also explains the features and functionality
associated with messaging.
Types of Messages
Your phone provides the following message types:
• Text Messages
• Multimedia (Picture, Video, and Audio) Messages
• IM Messages
• Email and Gmail Messages
• Google Talk
Message Icons on the Status Bar
Icons are displayed on the Status Bar at the top of the display
when new messages are received. For more information, refer to
“Status Bar” on page 23.
Creating and Sending Messages
The Short Message Service (SMS) lets you send and receive text
messages to and from other mobile phones or email addresses.
To use this feature, you may need to subscribe to your service
provider’s message service.
The Multimedia Messaging Service (MMS) lets you send and
receive multimedia messages (such as picture, video, and audio
messages) to and from other mobile phones or email addresses.
To use this feature, you may need to subscribe to your service
provider’s multimedia message service.
Important!: When creating a message, adding an image, a sound file, or a
video clip to a text message changes the message from a text
message to a multimedia message.
Messaging icons are displayed at the top of the screen and
indicate when messages are received and their type. For more
information, refer to “Indicator Icons” on page 23.
1.
From the Home screen, tap
(Messaging) ➔ New
message.
2.
Tap on the To field to manually enter a recipient or select
one of the following:
• Recent: to select a recipient from a list of recently sent messages.
• Contacts: to select a recipient from your Contacts list (valid entries
must have a wireless phone number or email address).
• Group: to select a recipient from the Group list.
Messages
98
3.
If adding a recipient from either Recent, Contacts, or
Group, tap the contact to place a checkmark then tap Add.
The contact displays in the recipient field.
Note: For the Group option, if the number of recipients is less than 10, all
members in the group are added. Delete any unnecessary members in
the list by selecting the trash can icon and deleting unwanted entries.
4.
Tap the Type to compose field and use the on-screen
keypad to enter a message. For more information, refer to
“Text Input Methods” on page 70.
5.
Add more recipients by tapping the Recipient field.
6.
Review your message and tap Send.
Note: If you exit a message before you touch send the message
automatically saves as a draft.
Message Options
(Messaging).
1.
From the Home screen, tap
2.
From within an open message, press
to display
additional messaging options:
• Add/Remove subject: inserts or deletes a Subject field in your
message.
99
• Attach: allows you to attach the following:
– Slideshow: allows you to create up to a 10 page slideshow to
attach to the message.
– Pictures: allows you to tap an existing image from your Pictures list to
add it to your message.
– Videos: allows you to tap an existing video file you wish to attach. The
selected video is automatically attached to the current message.
– Audio: allows you to choose an existing audio file from the Audio
list, then add it to your message by tapping OK.
– Capture picture: allows you to temporarily exit the message, take a
photo with phone’s camera, then add it to your message by touching
Save.
– Capture video: allows you to temporarily exit the message, record a
video clip using the phone’s, then add it to your message by
touching Save.
– Record audio: allows you to temporarily exit the message, record an
audio clip using the phone’s microphone, then add it to your message
➔ Add.
by tapping
– Contacts: allows you to tap on an existing Address Book entry to
add their contact info to your message.
– Calendar: allows you to tap on an existing Calendar event and add it
to your message.
– Memo: allows you to tap on an existing Memo and add it to your
message.
• Add text: allows you to add text items from sources such as:
Contacts, Calendar, Memo, and Text templates.
• Insert smiley: allows you to add insert smiley icons images
(emoticons).
• Delete messages allows you to either delete a specific
message bubble from the current message or choose to
Select all to delete the entire message thread.
• More: provides the following additional options:
Discard, Call, or Add to Contacts.
Viewing Newly Received Messages
When you receive a message, your phone notifies you by
displaying
within the Notification area at the top left of
your Home screen.
To read a message:
1.
Open the Notification Bar and select the message. For
more information, refer to “Notification Bar” on page 26.
– or –
From the Home screen, tap
then tap the new
message to view. The selected message displays on the
screen.
2.
Tap
3.
In a single motion, touch and scroll up or down the page to
to play a multimedia message.
scroll through the message (if additional pages were
added).
Messages
100
Message Threads
Sent and received text and
picture messages are grouped
into message threads.
Threaded messages allow you
to see all the messages
exchanged (similar to a chat
program) and displays a
contact on the screen.
6.
Current Recipient
– or –
My Text
text, Insert smiley, or More (Delete messages, Discard, and
To access additional Bubble options:
䊳
Reply Bubble
Text Message Thread
type your reply message.
5.
Compose your reply.
Your texts are colored Blue and your caller’s reply’s are
Yellow.
101
Touch and hold the message bubble to display the
following options:
While the message is
compose field and then
and then tap Send to select one of these
Call).
To reply to a text message: From
the Home screen, tap
.
open, tap the Type to
Press
messaging options: View contact, Add subject, Attach, Add
Message threads are listed in
the order in which they were
received, with the latest
message displayed at the top.
4.
Tap Send to review your reply.
• Delete message: deletes the currently selected message bubble
from the thread.
• Add to Contacts: adds the current caller to your Contacts list.
• Copy message text: copies the currently selected message bubble
from the thread.
• Lock/Unlock message: locks or unlocks the currently selected
message bubble from being accidentally deleted.
• Forward: allows you to forward the currently selected message
bubble to an external recipient.
• Copy to SIM: copies the currently selected message bubble as a
single text message within the SIM card.
• View message details: displays details for the currently selected
message bubble.
Deleting Messages
3.
Deleting a single message
which to search, then tap
.
1.
From the Home screen, tap
2.
Touch and hold a message from the list, then select Delete
3.
At the prompt, tap OK to delete or Cancel to cancel.
4.
.
All messages that contain the entered search string
display.
Messaging Settings
thread.
Deleting multiple messages
1.
From the Home screen, tap
2.
Press
3.
Use the on-screen keypad to enter a word or phrase in
.
and then tap Delete Threads.
Tap each message thread you want to delete. A checkmark
displays beside each selected message.
4.
Tap Delete.
5.
At the prompt, tap OK to delete or Cancel to end the
process.
Message Search
To configure the settings for text messages, multimedia
messages, Voice mails, and Push messages.
1.
From the Home screen, tap
2.
Press
.
and then tap Settings.
The following Messaging settings are available:
Storage settings
• Delete old messages: deletes old messages when the limit is
reached, rather than overwriting them.
• Text message limit: allows you to set a limit on how many text
messages are allowed in one conversation.
• Multimedia message limit: allows you to set a limit on how many
multimedia messages are allowed in one conversation.
You can search through your messages by using the Message
Search feature.
1.
From the Home screen, tap
2.
Press
.
and then tap Search.
Messages
102
Text message (SMS) settings
• Delivery reports: when this option is activated, the network informs
you whether or not your message was delivered.
• Manage SIM card messages: allows you to manage the
messages stored on the SIM card.
• Message center: allows you to enter the number of your message
center where your messages reside while the system is attempting
to deliver them.
• Input mode: allows you to set the input mode for your text
messages. Choose GSM Alphabet, Unicode, or Automatic.
• Reply path: allows you to set the reply path for each message you
send messages.
Multimedia message (MMS) settings
• Delivery reports: when this option is activated, the network informs
you whether or not your message was delivered.
• Read reports: when this option is activated, your phone receives a
request for a read reply along with your message to the recipient.
• Auto-retrieve: allows the message system to automatically retrieve
messages.
• Roaming auto-retrieve: allows the message system to
automatically retrieve while roaming.
• Creation mode: allows you to select the creation mode, Free,
Restricted, or Warning.
– Restricted: you can only create and submit messages with content
belonging to the Core MM Content Domain.
103
– Warning: the phone will warn you via pop up messages that you are
creating a multimedia message which does not fit the Core MM Content
Domain.
– Free: you may add any content to the message.
Notification settings
• Notifications: allows you to see message notifications on your
status bar.
• Select ringtone: allows you to set the ringtone for your message
notifications.
Text Templates
This screen displays your available text message reply
templates. This is a readily accessible list of both default and
user-defined text snippets that can be used to quickly reply to
incoming messages.
1.
From the Home screen, tap
2.
From the Messaging list, press
.
and then tap Text
templates.
3.
Tap a message to immediately insert it into your current
message conversation.
To create your own text template:
1.
From the Home screen, tap
2.
rom the Messaging list, press
• POP (Post Office Protocol) - This protocol is supported by most ISPs
.
and then tap Text
templates.
3.
Tap
(Create template).
4.
Enter a new text string and tap Save.
Email
Email (or Internet Email) enables you to review and create email
using several email services. You can also receive text message
alerts when you receive an important email. Your phone’s Email
application lets you access and manage multiple email accounts
simultaneously in one convenient location.
There are currently three main types of email accounts on your
phone: Gmail, Internet-based email (Gmail, Yahoo, etc..), and
Microsoft Exchange (Corporate email or Outlook®).
To send and receive email messages through an ISP (Internet
Service Provider) account, or if you wish to use your device to
access your corporate email through a VPN (Virtual Private
Network), you will first need to set up an IMAP or POP account.
• IMAP (Internet Message Access Protocol) - This protocol is frequently
used in large networks and commercial settings. IMAP4 is the current
standard.
(Internet service providers) and common among consumer
applications. POP3 is the current standard.
Creating an Internet Email Account
1.
From the Home screen, tap
(Applications) ➔
(Email). If you already have email accounts, your accounts
screen is displayed.
2.
Enter you email address in the Email address field. The
3.
Enter your password in the Password field, tap Next then
phone will try to resolve.
press Next.
• Tap Manual setup to configure your connection settings manually
(POP3 or IMAP). Follow the on-screen prompts and enter the
information specific to your email provider.
• The unique account name is used to differentiate this account from
other email accounts accessed by your device.
4. Tap Next at the Your accounts screen.
5.
At the prompt name the account and enter a screen name
to identify yourself on this account. If you have already
setup this account, skip to step 6.
Messages
104
6.
Messages for this account display on the Inbox tab. You
1.
From the Home screen, tap
Receipts (if you setup the account to return receipts),
2.
Press
3.
Select an email account.
4.
Tap Inbox and press
5.
Tap Compose.
6.
Enter the message recipient’s email address in the To field.
Travel information, and more (if available).
7.
Tap Done to store the new account.
Important!: Only some “Plus” accounts include POP access allowing this
program to connect. If you are not able to sign in with your
correct email address and password, you may not have a paid
“Plus” account. Launch the Web browser to access your
account.
Opening an Email
➔
1.
From the Home screen, tap
2.
Press
(Email).
3.
Select an email account and tap an email message.
and then tap Accounts.
Refreshing Email messages
1.
From the Home screen, tap
2.
Select an email account.
3.
Press
105
Composing Email
can also view Personal information for this account,
and then tap Refresh.
➔
(Email).
➔
(Email).
and then tap Accounts.
.
• If you are sending the email message to several recipients, separate
the email addresses with a comma. You can add as many message
recipients as you want.
• Use the Cc field to carbon copy additional recipients.
• Use the Bcc field to blind copy additional recipients.
7. Tap the Subject field and enter the email subject.
8.
Tap the email text field and compose your email message.
• To add a picture attachment, tap Attach (from the bottom of the
screen) and make a selection.
9. Once complete, tap Send.
Configuring Email Settings
1.
From the Home screen, tap
2.
Press
3.
Select an account.
4.
From the email list screen, press
➔
(Email).
and then tap Accounts.
and then tap More
➔ Account settings.
5.
Alter any of the following settings:
• Account name: displays your uniquely created account display
name.
• Your name: displays the name used in the From field of your
outgoing email messages.
• Email check frequency: Tap to adjust the time interval used by
your device to check your email account for new email messages.
• Default account: Assign this account as the default email account
used for outgoing messages.
• Security policy list: lists the current email’s security policy. These
policies could restrict some functions from corporate servers.
• Email notifications: Activates the email notification icon to appear
within the Notifications area of the status bar when a new Internet
mail (Gmail, etc..) is received.
• Select ringtone: Plays a selected ringtone when a new email
message is received.
• Vibrate: Activates a vibration when a new email message is
received.
• Incoming settings: Lets you specify incoming email settings, such
as username, password, and IMAP server.
• Outgoing settings: Lets you specify outgoing settings, such as
username, password, and SMTP server.
• Recent messages: Lets you assign the number of recent
messages that are displayed on-screen. Choose from: 25 - Total.
• Forward with files: Lets you include attachments when forwarding
an email.
• Add signature: Lets you attach a customized signature to the
bottom of all outgoing emails.
• Signature: Lets you create an email signature for your outgoing
Gmail email messages.
Messages
106
Microsoft Exchange Email (Outlook)
4.
Your phone also provides access to your company’s Outlook
Exchange server. If your company uses either Microsoft
Exchange Server 2003 or 2007, you can use this email
application to wirelessly synchronize your email, Contacts, and
Calendar information directly with your company’s Exchange
server.
Enter a Domain, and confirm your Username, and Password
information and tap Next.
• If your network requires SSL encryption, tap the Accept all SSL
certificates field to place a check mark in the box and activate this
additional level.
Important!: If your exchange server requires this SSL feature, leaving this
field unchecked can prevent connection.
Setting Up a Microsoft Exchange Email account
➔
1.
From the Home screen, tap
2.
If you already have other email account setup:
• Press
• Press
(Email).
5.
tap OK and manually enter your Exchange server
information within the appropriate field.
and then tap Accounts.
and then tap Add account.
• Exchange Server: your exchange server remote email address.
Typically starts with mail.XXX.com. Obtain this information from
your company network administrator. Do not accept the default
entry as this is a guess based on returned information.
– or –
Enter your Email address and Password information, and
then tap Next. Consult your Network or IT Administrator for
further details and support.
• Email address: your Outlook work email address.
• Password: typically your network access password (casesensitive).
3. Tap Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync (from the add new
email account screen).
107
If prompted with a connection or Auto discover failed error,
Important!: It is recommended that you delete any text in the Exchange
server field and enter your server information manually.
6.
With the new server information entered, tap Done ➔ Next.
7.
Read the on-screen activation disclaimer and, if prompted,
tap Yes.
8.
Adjust the various on-screen configuration fields and tap
Next.
9.
Identify your new account with a unique name and provide
5.
the outgoing name text then tap Done.
• Use the Cc field to carbon copy additional recipients.
• Use the Bcc field to blind copy additional recipients.
• If you are sending the email message to several recipients,
separate the email addresses with a comma. You can add as many
message recipients as you want.
6. Tap the Subject field and enter the email subject.
Important!: You might be prompted to activate additional device
administration features if required by your server. Tap Activate to
accept the administration function.
Opening an Exchange Email
➔
1.
From the Home screen, tap
2.
Press
(Email).
3.
Select an exchange email account and tap an email
and then tap Accounts.
message.
Refreshing Exchange Email
➔
1.
From the Home screen, tap
2.
Select an exchange email account.
3.
Press
(Email).
7.
Enter the message recipient’s email address in the To field.
Tap the email text field and compose your email message.
• To add a picture attachment, tap Attach (from the bottom of the
screen) and make a selection.
• Tap the file you wish to attach and tap OK.
8. Once complete, tap Send.
Deleting an Exchange Email Message
䊳
Touch and hold an email (from your inbox list) and select
Delete from the on-screen context menu.
and then tap Refresh.
– or –
Composing Exchange Email
With the email message displayed, press
➔
1.
From the Home screen, tap
2.
Press
3.
Select an exchange email account.
4.
Tap Inbox and press
(Email).
and then
tap Delete.
and then tap Accounts.
and then tap Compose.
Messages
108
Configuring Microsoft Exchange Email Settings
1.
Press
2.
Tap
➔
and then tap
➔ Accounts and
sync.
within the Microsoft Exchange account field to
reveal the account’s synchronization settings screen.
3.
Toggle either the Sync Contacts or Sync Calendar fields to
force the device to manually resync either the exchange
Contacts or Calendar entries.
– or –
Tap Account settings and specify any other email settings
you wish to synchronize:
• Account name displays the name used by the device to track the
account.
• Amount to synchronize to assign the sync range for your incoming
and outgoing email messages between your phone and your
external exchange server. How many days worth of email
messages should the phone and server synchronize. Choose from:
1 day, 3 days, 1 week, 2 weeks, or 1 month.
• Default account assigns this account as the default used when
sending out new email messages.
• Out of office settings assigns this account’s out of office settings.
109
• Empty server trash: allows you to delete your email account’s
trash bin remotely.
• Sync schedule allows you to configure your email sync schedule.
• Email size configures the incoming email size allowed to pass
through to your phone automatically without user interaction. Larger
emails will have to be retrieved manually.
• Security policy list: lists the current email’s security policy. These
policies could restrict some functions from corporate servers.
• Email notifications enables the phone to display a status bar icon
when new email messages have been received.
• Select ringtone assigns an audible ringtone when a new or
upcoming event is pending.
• Vibrate assigns a vibration when a new or upcoming event is
pending.
• Exchange server settings provides access to the Domain,
password, and exchange server settings.
• Sync Contacts synchronizes the contacts between your phone and
the remote exchange server.
• Sync Calendar synchronizes your exchange calendar entries
between your phone and the remote exchange server.
• Period to sync Calendar assigns a period for your phone to sync
calendar events.
• Add signature activates the email signature feature.
• Signature allows you to create an outgoing email signature
attached to new email messages sent from your phone.
4.
Press
Refreshing Google Mail
to return to the previous page.
Using Google Mail
䊳
Google Mail (Gmail) is Google’s web-based email. When you first
setup the phone, Gmail is configured. Depending on the
synchronization settings, Gmail is automatically synchronized
with your Gmail account.
Signing into Google Mail
1.
From the Home screen, tap
➔
(Gmail).
Note: You must sign in to your Gmail account in order to access features
such as Google Mail and Android Market.
2.
Tap Next to add a Google account.
3.
Tap Create if you do not have a Google account.
From within the Gmail message list, press
and then
tap Refresh to send and receive new emails and
synchronize your email with the Gmail account.
Composing a Gmail Message
1.
From the Home screen, tap
➔
2.
From the Gmail Inbox, press
and then tap Compose.
3.
Enter the recipients Email address in the To field.
(Gmail).
Tip: Separate multiple recipient email addresses with a comma.
4.
Press
and select Add Cc/Bcc to add a carbon or blind
copy.
– or –
5.
Enter the subject of this message in the Subject field.
Tap Sign in if you have a Google account.
6.
Tap the Compose Mail field and begin composing your
The Inbox loads conversations and email.
message.
Opening Gmail
1.
From the Home screen, tap
2.
Tap an existing email message.
7.
➔
Once complete tap
(Send).
(Gmail).
Messages
110
Viewing a Gmail Message
1.
From the Gmail Inbox, tap a message to view. The
following options are available:
• Archive: archives the selected Email.
• Delete: deletes the Email.
• <: displays older Emails.
• >: displays newer Emails.
2. Press
to select one of the following additional
options:
• Change labels: changes the label on the email or conversation.
• Mark unread: unread messages or threads with unread messages
display in boldface text in the Inbox.
• Go to inbox: displays the Google Mail Inbox.
• Mute: mutes the conversation.
• Add/Remove star: click a message's star to add or remove the
star (just like clicking flags in Outlook).
• More:
– Report spam: reports the Email message as spam.
– Settings: allows you to configure the General, or Notification settings.
– Help: launches the browser and displays Google Mobile Help
information.
– Select text: allows you to select text to copy and paste.
111
Google Talk
Google Talk™ is a free Windows and web-based application for
instant messaging offered by Google. Conversation logs are
automatically saved to a Chats area in your Gmail account. This
allows you to search a chat log and store them in your Gmail
accounts.
➔
1.
From the Home screen, tap
2.
Tap Next to add a Google account.
(Talk).
3.
Tap Create if you do not have a Google account.
– or –
Tap Sign in if you have a Google account. The Inbox loads
conversations and email.
4.
After entering your user name and password, tap the Down
Navigation key.
5.
Tap Sign in.
6.
Begin using Google Talk.
Note: The Network confirms your login and processes. This could take up to
5 minutes to complete.
Section 8: Multimedia
This section explains how to use the multimedia features of your
phone, including the Camera/Camcorder, Music Player, and how
to manage your photos, images and sounds.
This section explains how to use the camera on your phone. You
can take photographs and shoot video by using the built-in
camera functionality. Your camera produces photos in JPEG
format.
Important!: Do not take photos of people without their permission.
Do not take photos in places where cameras are not allowed.
Do not take photos in places where you may interfere with
another person’s privacy.
2.
Using the phone’s main display screen as a viewfinder,
adjust the image by aiming the camera at the subject.
3.
Before you take a picture, zoom in or out by using either:
• The Up and Down Volume keys.
• Tapping the screen with two fingers and then dragging outwards.
You can magnify the picture up to x4 (400 percent).
4.
If desired, before taking the photo, touch the left tab to
access various camera options and settings.
5.
Using the Camera
You can also touch the screen to move the focus to the
area you tap.
Taking Photos
6.
Taking pictures with your device’s built-in camera is as simple as
choosing a subject, pointing the camera, then pressing the
camera key.
Press the Camera key until the shutter sounds. (The picture
is automatically stored within your designated storage
location. If no microSD is installed, all pictures are stored
on the Phone.) For more information, refer to “Camera and
Camcorder Options” on page 113.
Note: When taking a photo in direct sunlight or in bright conditions, shadows
may appear on the photo.
1.
From the Home screen, tap
(Camera).
Multimedia
112
2.
1
8
various modes. Once you change the mode, the
corresponding indicator appears at the top left of the
2
display. Choose from Camera or Camcorder.
3
7
4
6
5
Camera and Camcorder Options
You can change options using your keypad in capture mode.
Camera Options
The following short cuts are available for the camera:
Note: The options disappear after a few seconds. Touch the screen to display
the tab, then touch the tab to view these options.
1.
Front/Rear: allows you to activate either the front facing or
rear camera lenses.
113
Camera / Camcorder Mode: allows you to take a photo in
3.
Shooting mode: allows you to set the following options:
• Single shot: takes a single photo and view it before returning to the
shooting mode.
• Smile shot: the camera focuses on the face of your subject. Once
the camera detects the person’s smile, it takes the picture.
• Panorama: takes a landscape photo by taking an initial photo and
then adding additional images to itself. The guide box lets you view
the area where the second part of the panoramic picture should fall
within.
• Beauty: adjusts the contrast to smooth facial features.
• Continuous: takes a succession of consecutive photos by pressing
and holding the Camera key.
• Vintage: gives your photo a vintage look (hazy around the edges).
Touch the icon in the lower left corner of the display screen to
choose a Normal, Warm, Cool, or Mono effect.
• Add me: combines people with existing background. Touch the
screen to pick which side of the screen to focus on. Press the
camera key. Focus on a background and press the camera key a
second time.
• Cartoon: gives your photo a cartoon look.
• Action shot: detects action and creates a panorama of the moving
object.
4. Default Dest.: sets the default destination for sending or
saving pictures. Selections are: Recent recipient, Phone
Book, Online Album, New Email, or New Number.
5.
Exposure: sets the total amount of light allowed to fall on
the subject through the lens sensor while taking a
picture.Touch and drag the slider to the left (to decrease
the value), to the right (to increase the value). You can also
touch the Minus icon (to decrease the value) or the Plus
icon (to increase the value).
6.
Image viewer: displays the photo for quick viewing.
7.
Camera button: takes a photo when pressed in Camera
mode.
8.
Settings: displays two types of settings, Camera (first tab)
and General settings (second tab).
Camera settings:
• Outdoor visibility: enhances LCD visibility outdoors.
• Focus mode: sets the focus mode to: Auto focus, Macro (close up
photos), or Face detection (recognizes there is a face in the shot
and optimizes exposure for it).
• Scene mode: to select a camera setting for better image capture
under different lighting environments. Choose from: None (default),
Portrait, Landscape, Night, Sports, Party/Indoor, Beach/Snow,
Sunset, Dawn, Fall color, Firework, Text, Candlelight and Backlight.
• Timer: allows you to set a time delay before the camera takes the
photo. Select the length of delay you want and touch the Off,
2 sec, 5 sec, and 10 sec. When you press the Camera key, the
camera takes the photo after the specified time elapses.
• Resolution: sets the photo resolution to: 2560x1920, 2560x1536,
2048x1536, 2048x1232, 1600x1200, 1600x960, 640x480, or
800x480.
• White balance: allows you to set this option from the following
choices: Auto, Cloudy, Fluorescent, Daylight, or Incandescent.
• Effects: allows you to change the color tone or apply special effects
to the photo. Options include: Normal, Black and White, Negative,
or Sepia.
• ISO: allows you to adjust the ISO sensitivity of the camera imaging
sensor. Selections are: ISO Auto, ISO 100, ISO 200, ISO 400, or
ISO 800 speed.
• Metering: allows you to set how the camera measures or meters
the light source: Centre weighted, Spot, or Matrix.
• Anti-Shake: allows you to touch On to activate Anti-Shake, or Off
to deactivate it.
• Auto contrast: automatically sets the contrast.
• Blink detection: camera detects the user's blinks and adjusts to
capture the subject perfectly.
Multimedia
114
• Image quality: allows you to set the image quality to: Superfine,
Fine, or Normal.
• Adjust: allows you to adjust the Contrast, Saturation and Sharpness
for this photo.
General settings:
• Guidelines: displays alignment or framing guidelines to perfectly
set up each shot.
• Review: displays the photo for review.
• GPS tag: records GPS information into image files.
• Shutter sound: allows you to select a tone to play when the
camera’s shutter opens and closes. Sound selections are Sound 1,
Sound 2, Sound 3, or Off.
• Reset: resets the camera settings to the default settings.
• Touch Screen: allows you to assign an action when you tap the
screen. Choose from Focus or Capture.
Camcorder Options
You can change options using your keypad in capture mode. The
following short cuts are available:
1
8
2
7
3
4
6
5
1.
Front/Rear: allows you to activate either the front facing or
rear camera lenses.
2.
Camcorder / Camera Mode: allows you to record a video
various modes. Once you change the mode, the
corresponding indicator appears at the top left of the
display. Choose from Camcorder or Camera.
3.
115
Recording mode: Normal or Limit for MMS.
4.
Default Dest.: sets the default destination for sending or
saving videos. Selections are: Recent recipient, Phone
Book, Online Album, New Email, or New Number.
5.
Exposure: sets the total amount of light allowed to fall on
the subject through the lens sensor while recording a
video. Touch and drag the slider to the left to decrease the
value, or to the right to increase the value. Or touch the
Minus icon to decrease the value, or the Plus icon to
increase the value.
6.
Image viewer: displays the video for quick viewing.
7.
Camcorder button: records a video when pressed in
Camcorder mode.
8.
Settings: displays two types of settings, Camcorder (first
tab) and General settings (second tab).
Camcorder settings:
• Outdoor visibility: enhances LCD visibility outdoors.
• Timer: allows you to set a time delay before the camcorder records
the video. Select the length of delay you want and touch the Off,
2 sec, 5 sec, and 10 sec. When you press the Camera key, the
camcorder records the video after the specified time elapses.
• Resolution: sets the video resolution to: 1280x720, 720x480,
640x480, 320x240, or 176x144.
• White balance: allows you to set this option from the following
choices: Auto, Cloudy, Fluorescent, Daylight, or Incandescent.
• Effects: allows you to change the color tone or apply special effects
to the photo. Options include: Normal, Black and White, Negative,
or Sepia.
• Video quality: allows you to set the video quality to: Superfine, Fine,
or Normal.
• Adjust: allows you to adjust the Contrast, Saturation and Sharpness
for this video.
General settings:
• Guidelines: displays alignment or framing guidelines to perfectly
set up each recording.
• Audio recording: activates audio recording feature so you can
record audio while recording the video.
• Review: set to On to review the recorded video.
• Reset: resets the camcorder settings to the default settings.
• Touch Screen: allows you to assign the Capture action when you
tap the screen.
Multimedia
116
Pictures and Videos Image Viewer Options
After you take a photo or record a video, you can access various
options.
Photo options
• Share: allows you to share a picture using AllShare, Messaging,
Bluetooth, Picasa, Facebook, Email, Gmail, Kodak, or Snapfish.
• Set as: sets the photo as a Contact icon, Home screen Wallpaper,
or Lock screen Wallpaper.
• More:
– Send to My Album Online: sends this photo to My Album Online.
– Set Default Destination: sets the default photo location to: Recent log,
Contacts, Online album, New Email address, or New Phone number.
– Delete: deletes this photo.
Video options
• Share: allows you to share a video using AllShare, Messaging,
Bluetooth, YouTube, Facebook, Email, Gmail, Kodak, and Snapfish.
• Play: plays the current video using the Video Player.
• More:
– Send to My Album Online: sends this video to My Album Online.
– Set Default Destination: sets the default photo location to: Recent log,
Contacts, Online album, New Email address, or New Phone number.
– Delete: deletes this video.
117
Camera Gallery Options
The Gallery is where you can access the Gallery of stored camera
images.
1.
From the Home screen,
tap
➔
2.
(Applications)
(Gallery).
Select a folder location
(ex: Camera) and select
an image by tapping it
once to place a green
check mark on the file.
3.
Press
from this
main Gallery screen to
reveal gallery-specific
options Share, Delete,
and More.
Camera Image Options
When you take a picture, the file is saved in the Photo folder. You
can view your pictures immediately or view them anytime in the
Photo folder.
1.
From the Home screen, tap
(Applications) ➔
(Gallery).
2.
Select a folder location and tap a file to open it in the
Image viewer. Touch and drag a picture to the left to see
the next picture or to the right to see the previous picture.
3.
Tap Slideshow to initiate an on-screen slideshow
displaying every image in the current folder.
– or –
Tap Menu to display the following image menu options:
• Share: lets you share selected pictures with AllShare, Messaging,
Bluetooth, Picasa, Facebook, Email, Gmail, Kodak, or Snapfish.
• Delete: allows you to delete the current image.
Multimedia
118
• More: provides you with the additional options such as:
– Send to My Album Online: allows you to send the file to your
pre-configure My Album Online.
– Set Default Destination: allows you to assign a default action to take
after taking an image (Recent log, Contacts, Online album, New Email
address, or New Phone number).
– Details: files details such as Title, Type, Date taken, Album, Location,
latitude, Longitude, etc..
– Set as: allows you to assign a picture to one of three location: Home
screen Wallpaper, Lock screen Wallpaper, or to a Contact’s icon image.
– Crop: provides an on-screen box that allows you to crop the current
picture. Tap Save to update the image with the new dimensions or
Discard to ignore any changes.
– Add to Slideshow: adds the selected photo to a custom slideshow.
– Rotate left: allows you to rotate the view of the current image in a
counterclockwise direction.
– Rotate right: allows you to rotate the view of the current image in a
clockwise direction.
Assigning an Image as a Contact Icon
1.
From the Home screen, tap
(Applications) ➔
(Gallery).
2.
Select a folder location and tap a file to open it in the
Image viewer.
119
3.
With the image displayed, tap Menu ➔ More ➔ Set as ➔
Contact icon.
4.
Tap a contact to make a selection.
5.
Crop the image and tap Save.
Assigning an Image as a Wallpaper
1.
From the Home screen, tap
(Applications) ➔
(Gallery).
2.
Select a folder location and tap a file to open it in the
Image viewer.
3.
With the image displayed, tap Menu ➔ More ➔ Set as.
4.
Select one of the two options:
• Home screen Wallpaper assigns the current image to the home
screen background. This image is spread across all available
screens.
• Lock screen Wallpaper assigns the selected image to the
background for the lock screen.
5. Touch and drag the crop box anywhere on the picture.
Touch and drag the sides of the crop box to zoom in or out
to create a cropped area.
6.
Tap Save to assign the wallpaper image.
3.
Press the record video key (
– or –
4.
Tap
Tap Discard to stop without updating the wallpaper image.
Using the Camcorder
to pause the recording or touch
to stop the
recording and save the video file to your Photo folder.
5.
In addition to taking photos, the camera also doubles as a
camcorder that also allows you to record, view, and send high
definition videos.
) to begin shooting video.
Once the file is saved, tap Play to play your video for
review.
6.
Press
to return to the viewer.
Camcorder Options
Note: To ensure the Camcorder can record the video, use an SDHC memory
card.
Camcorder options are represented by icons across both sides of
the screen.
Shooting Video
For more information, refer to “Camera and Camcorder Options”
on page 113.
Tip: When shooting video in direct sunlight or in bright conditions, it is
recommended that you provide your subject with sufficient light by
having the light source behind you.
1.
From the Home screen, tap
(Applications) ➔
(Camcorder) to activate the camcorder mode.
2.
Using the phone’s main display screen as a viewfinder,
Accessing Videos
When you shoot a video, the file is saved in the Camera folder.
You can view your videos immediately or view them anytime in
the Camera folder.
1.
From the Home screen, tap
(Applications) ➔
(Gallery).
adjust the image by aiming the camcorder at the subject.
Multimedia
120
2.
Select a folder location and tap a video icon to begin video
playback.
– or –
Touch and hold the video icon from the main Gallery to
select the video (green check mark) and display the
Amazon MP3
Amazon MP3 is a digital music store owned and operated by
Amazon.com. Using Amazon MP3 you can download DRM-Free
(digital rights management) MP3 formatted songs and albums.
1.
2.
Tap one of the categories to begin browsing the
music files.
3.
Follow the on-screen instructions to download music.
Note: A data plan is required to use this feature. Charges may apply. Please
contact your service provider for further details.
Files
Files allows you to manage your sounds, images, videos,
bluetooth files, Android files, and other memory card data in one
convenient location. This application allows you to launch a file if
the associated application is already on your phone (ex: MP4 and
DivX).
䊳
From the Home screen, tap
(Files).
121
(Applications) ➔
(Amazon MP3).
following video menu context options:
• Share: lets you share selected pictures with AllShare, Messaging,
Bluetooth, YouTube, Facebook, Email, Gmail, Kodak, or Snapfish.
• Delete: allows you to delete chosen/selected pictures. Touch the
checkmark, to turn it green, next to any file or folder you want to
delete, then touch Delete.
• More: provides you with the additional options such as:
– Send to My Album Online: allows you to send the file to your
pre-configure My Album Online.
– Set Default Destination: allows you to assign a default action to take
after shooting video (Recent log, Phonebook, Online album, New Email
address or New Phone number).
– Details: displays video file information.
From the Home screen, tap
(Applications) ➔
Note: Navigation in this viewer works on a hierarchy structure with folders,
subfolders, etc.
Opening and Navigating within Files
DCIM is the default location for pictures or video taken by the
device. These files are actually stored in the DCIM folder location.
(Applications) ➔
1.
From the Home screen, tap
2.
Tap a folder and scroll down or up until you locate your
(Files).
selected file.
• Up tab allows you to back up into a higher directory.
• Home tab allows you to back up to the root directory.
• Press
and then tap View by to change the way the files are
displayed on-screen. Choose from: List, List and details, or
Thumbnail.
The Gallery
The Gallery is where you view photos and play back videos. For
photos, you can also perform basic editing tasks, view a
slideshow, set photos as wallpaper or caller image, and share as
a picture message.
Note: If the phone displays a memory full message when accessing the
Gallery, access Files and remove some of the media files from the
folders, and then open the Gallery.
Opening the Gallery
䊳
From the Home screen, tap
(Applications) ➔
(Gallery). For more information, refer to “Camera
Gallery Options” on page 117.
Note: If you stored your files in folders (directories) on the storage card,
Gallery displays these folders as separate albums. The top left album
contains all the pictures in the storage card.
• Press
for these additional options: Share, Create folder,
Delete, View by, List by, and More (Move, Copy, Rename, Print via
Bluetooh, Bluetooth visibility, and Settings).
3.
Once you have located your file, tap the file name to
launch the associated application.
Multimedia
122
Using the Video Player
Media Hub
The Video Player application plays video files stored on the SD card.
1.
From the Home screen, tap
(Applications) ➔
(Videos). A list of videos sorted on the SD card
displays in the Video list.
2.
Touch a video file to begin viewing.
INCEPTION
The movie INCEPTION comes preloaded on the memory card
included with this phone.
1.
Confirm the preloaded memory card is in the SD slot. For
more information, refer to “Installing the microSD Memory
Card” on page 9.
2.
From the Home screen, tap
(Inception).
3.
Log into Media Hub (required the first time you tap the
icon). For more information, refer to “Media Hub” on
page 123. The movie plays back within the built-in video
player application.
Warning!: If the microSD card is accidentally reformatted, or the movie file is
manually deleted, you will be unable to retrieve or replace the
deleted movie file.
123
Samsung Media Hub is your one stop for the hottest movie and
TV content. With hundreds of titles available, entertaining your
family on the go was never easier. You can rent or purchase your
favorite content and watch from any location. Featuring the
stunning viewing quality Samsung is known for, Samsung Media
Hub is your gateway to mobile video like you've never
experienced it before.
Note: Media Hub usage is based on service availability.
Important!: You must be using an active Wi-Fi/4G connection to preview and
download a media file.
You must have a microSD card installed prior to initiating the
service. This card acts as a storage location for your downloaded
rental or purchase.
Creating a New Media Hub Account
Before you can rent or buy media, you must first create an
account. Enter the required information.
1.
From the Home screen, tap
(Applications) ➔
(MediaHub).
2.
Press
3.
Use the keypad to enter the required information, then tap
and tap My Account.
• My Media: allows you to view all of the media that you have
purchased or rented. Touch a media entry to view it.
• Movie Store: displays movies that are available for rent or
purchase. Scroll through the movie categories at the top of the
screen. Touch a category and movies of that type display.
• TV Store: displays TV shows that are available for purchase. Scroll
through the movie categories at the top of the screen. Touch a
category and TV shows of that type display.
4. Scroll through the media listings and tap on an item you
Create Account.
4.
would like to purchase or rent.
From the My Account screen, you can edit parameters
5.
such as: My Details, My Purchases, My Payment Methods,
Manage My Devices, Log out, or Reset Media Hub.
Using Media Hub
1.
From the Home screen, tap
Read the End-User License Agreement (EULA) and tap
Accept to continue or Decline to exit.
3.
or Own.
6.
Choose a payment method and then follow the on-screen
instructions. The media stores to the My Media folder.
(Applications) ➔
(MediaHub).
2.
Tap WATCH PREVIEW to watch a short preview or tap Rent
At the Media Hub screen select one of the following
options:
• What’s new: shows recently added media that is available for rent
or purchase.
Media Hub Notices
• Any media item (Media Content) may be rented or purchased after you
create an account in Media Hub.
• Media Content that is downloaded may be viewed concurrently on up
to five (5) devices with Media Hub that are also registered to the same
account.
• You may choose to remove a device from your account no more than
once every 30 days.
Multimedia
124
• You may remove Media Content from a device as many times as you’d
like. You will have the ability to re-download the Media Content at a
later point in time subject to content re-download availability and
studio permissions.
• You MUST be in network coverage to license Media Content you have
acquired through the Service.
• You must have Wi-Fi connectivity in order to download Media Content.
• Unlike purchased Media Content, rented Media Content will be
viewable on only 1 device in your account.
• Media Content is downloaded and saved onto the SD card.
• Your Media Content may pause/stop or not download in networks
where there is a weak signal.
• You may begin watching downloaded Media Content as soon as a)
license acquisition has occurred and b) sufficient amount of the Media
Content has been buffered.
• You must finish watching rented Media Content within 24 consecutive
hours of start of playback.
• Stopping, pausing or restarting rented Media Content does not
extend the available viewing time.
• In no event will rented Media Content be available for a period of
more than thirty (30) days (or shorter on a title-by-title basis) after
the Media Content has been rented (e.g., if you begin viewing
rented Media Content on the 29th day after the rental transaction,
but do not finish viewing the entire title, that rented Media Content
may not be available for the entire twenty-four (24) consecutive
hour period if such period would extend the viewable time beyond
the thirty (30) day rental window).
• You cannot play any media content downloaded from Media Hub
through any output on your mobile phone, including All Share.
Music Player
Playing Music
1.
From the Home screen, tap
(Applications) ➔
(Music Player). Music player tips display.
2.
Tap Done.
3.
Tap a tab to select the music category: All, Playlists,
Albums, Artists or Genres.
4.
Scroll through the list and tap an entry to begin playback.
Note: The 5.1 channel sound effect works when earphones or sound is
connected through the earphone port only.
125
The following Music Player controls are available during
5.
playback:
Pause the song.
Start the song after pausing.
5.1Ch
((
))
Music Player Options
The Music Player Settings menu allows you to set preferences for
the music player such as whether you want the music to play in
the background, sound effects, and how the music menu
displays.
䊳
With the music player application displayed and a song
and select one of the following
Press and hold to rewind the song. Tap to go to
previous song.
playing, press
Press and hold to fast-forward the song. Tap to go
to next song.
Volume control.
• Add to quicklist: adds the selected music file to a quick playlist.
• Via Bluetooth: plays the music through a Bluetooth stereo headset.
• Share music via: shares a music file via Messaging, Bluetooth,
Email, or Gmail.
• Set as: sets this song as a Phone ringtone, Caller ringtone, or Alarm
tone.
• Go to disc view: displays the selections in a circular, cd disc view.
• More:
– Add to playlist: adds a song to the playlist.
– Settings: allows you to activate or deactivate the Equalizer, Effect, or
Visualization. Also allows you to set which Music menus you want to
display. Selections are: Albums, Artists, Genres, Folders, Composers,
Years, Most played, Recently played, or Recently added. Tap each item
that you want to display in the Music menu.
– Stop playing music: stops playing the currently selected song or
playlist.
Allows you to listen to music using 5.1 Virtual
Surround Sound.
Plays the entire song list once.
Repeats the currently playing song.
Replays the current list when the list ends.
shuffles the current list of songs randomly.
songs play in order and are not shuffled.
options:
Multimedia
126
– Details: displays details about the selected music.
4.
Using Playlists
Creating a Playlist
From the Home screen, tap
1.
From the Home screen, tap
(Applications) ➔
(Music Player).
➔ Create.
Press
4.
Backspace over the default playlist title and type a new
name for this playlist, then tap Save.
Adding Music to a Playlist
2.
Tap the Playlists tab.
3.
Tap the playlist name in which to delete music.
4.
Touch and hold a song to reveal the on-screen context
menu.
(Applications) ➔
(Music Player).
2.
Tap the Playlists tab.
3.
Tap the playlist name in which to add music.
127
Tap a music file, or tap Select all to add all the music tracks
to this playlist then tap Add.
Removing Music from a Playlist
Tap the Playlists tab.
From the Home screen, tap
(Add music).
Note: If a playlist is empty, add a song by touching a holding a song name
from the main screen to open the context menu. Select Add to playlist.
5.
3.
1.
Tap
(Applications) ➔
(Music Player).
2.
and tap Add.
– or –
Playlists are used to assign music files into groups for playback.
These Playlists can be created using the Music player on this
device, or using a third-party application (such as Windows
Media Player) and downloading those files to an SD card inserted
into the device.
1.
Press
5.
Tap Remove ➔ OK.
Removing Music Files
Editing a Playlist
From the Home screen, tap
(Applications) ➔
Besides adding and removing music files in a playlist, you can
also share, delete, or rename the playlist.
1.
Only those playlist you have created can be edited. Default
playlists can not be renamed.
2.
Tap the All tab.
3.
Touch and hold a song entry to reveal the on-screen
1.
From the Home screen, tap
(Applications) ➔
(Music Player).
context menu.
(Music Player).
2.
Tap the Playlists tab.
3.
Touch and hold a playlist entry to reveal the on-screen
context menu.
4.
Tap Edit title.
5.
Enter a new name for this playlist and tap Save.
4.
T-Mobile TV HD
T-Mobile TV HD is an application that allows you to get live TV
and Video on Demand.
1.
1.
(Applications) ➔
page displays.
Note: A data plan is required to use this feature. Charges may apply. Please
contact your service provider for further details.
Downloaded to the phone from or Android Market.
Music files are directly stored on your phone.
2.
From the Home screen, tap
(T-Mobile TV HD). The T-Mobile Terms and Conditions
Transferring Music Files
Music files can be downloaded to the phone using one of two
methods:
Tap Delete ➔ OK. The music file(s) is deleted.
Downloaded to the phone via a direct USB connection.
2.
Tap Accept if you accept the Terms and Conditions, or tap
Exit.
Music files are stored into a Music folder on the SD card.
For more information, refer to “USB Settings” on page 201.
Multimedia
128
Note: T-Mobile TV must be initialized over a cellular network before it can be
used. During this initial registration process, any current Wi-Fi
connections must be disabled.
3.
Tap Disable Wi-Fi if you currently have an active Wi-Fi
connection.
4.
Tap any of the following categories to begin viewing: Live
Channels, Live TV, On Demand, My Media, More Info,
Browse, Live Channels, or Start Trial/Purchase.
YouTube
YouTube is a video sharing website on which users can upload
and share videos, and view them in MPEG-4 format.
1.
From the Home screen, tap
(Applications) ➔
(YouTube).
2.
Tap Accept if you accept the Terms and Conditions, or tap
Decline.
3.
When the screen loads you can begin searching and
viewing posted videos.
4.
Press
➔ Settings ➔ High quality on mobile if you
prefer high quality output.
129
Section 9: Applications and Development
This section outlines the various applications that are available on
your phone.
Applications
The Applications list provides quick access to all the available
applications on the phone.
Refer to the application table on page 36 for a description of each
Application, its function, and how to navigate through that
particular application. If the application is already described in
another section of this user manual, then a cross reference to
that particular section is provided.
Accounts and sync
This application allows you to configure general synchronization
settings that determine whether the background data is
synchronized, and whether you automatically synchronize data
with the phone.
For more information, refer to “Accounts and Synchronization”
on page 201.
Add to Home
This shortcut allows you to add Widgets, Shortcuts, Folders, or
Wallpapers to the Home screen. For more information, refer to
“Adding and Deleting Screens” on page 44.
䊳 From the Home screen, tap
(Applications) ➔
(Add to Home).
Note: You can also locate an empty area of a selected screen and touch and
hold an area to launch the Add to Home screen popup.
Alarm & Clocks
Here you can set an alarm, configure and view the World clock,
use a stopwatch, or set a timer. The applications display in a
tabular format and quickly accessed with the touch of a finger.
For more information, refer to “Alarm and Clocks” on page 177.
䊳 From the Home screen, tap
(Applications) ➔
(Alarm & Clocks).
Applications and Development
130
AllShare
This application wirelessly synchronizes your Samsung mobile
phone with your TV, streams content and even keeps tabs on
who calls or sends text messages with real-time, on-screen
monitoring. Samsung’s AllShare makes staying connected easy.
Allows users to share their in-device media content with other
external devices using DLNA certified™ (Digital Living Network
Alliance) Devices. These external devices must also be
DLNA-compliant. Wi-Fi capability can be provided to TVs via a
digital multimedia streamer.
Important!: You must activate Wi-Fi to use this application. For more
information, refer to “Wi-Fi settings” on page 180.
1.
From the Home screen, tap
(Applications) ➔
• Play file from server on my phone allows you to receive and
playback media stored externally (server, laptop, etc.) directly on
your device.
• Play file from server on another player via my phone allows you
to “piggy-back” content playback on an external Wi-Fi TV/receiver.
Your phone retrieves content from an external wireless source (eg.,
server) and pushes it through to an external wireless destination
(eg., TV). The phone acts to both route the media and control its
playback (as a remote).
Configuring AllShare Settings
The AllShare™ application must first be configured prior to its
initial use. You must setup parameters such as connected Wi-FI,
Items to share, source server address, and external device
acceptance rights.
1.
Follow the on-screen prompts.
The application contains three separate streaming media
options:
• Play file from my phone on another player allows you to play
local device content on a Wi-Fi capable TV or playback device. The
phone can then be used as a remote to control playback.
131
(Applications) ➔
(AllShare).
(AllShare).
2.
From the Home screen, tap
2.
Tap Settings and configure the following settings as
desired:
• Media server name allows you to enter the name of the server
transmitting the media files. ex., MyServer. Once you enter the
name tap Save.
• Share media allows you to configure which media types will be
shared. Choose from Share video, Share audio, or Share picture.
• Access point network allows you to turn on your Wi-Fi
functionality and connect to an available Wi-Fi Access Point.
• Upload from other devices allows you to setup an acceptance rule
of incoming media from other external devices. Choose from
Always accept, Always ask, or Always reject and tap OK.
3. Press
to return to the previous page.
Receiving Media via AllShare
1.
From the Home screen, tap
2.
Tap
Tap
adjacent to one of the selected transmission
methods. (This procedure assumes selection of the second
option.)
(Applications) ➔
(AllShare).
2.
(Applications) ➔
(AllShare).
Transmitting Media via AllShare
1.
From the Home screen, tap
3.
Tap a source media server from the on-screen list. If you
server does not appear, tap Refresh.
adjacent to one of the selected transmission
methods. (This procedure assumes selection of the first
option).
3.
If transmitting local media to an external device, scroll
through your microSD card folders to locate the file(s) you
wish to transmit. A green checkmark indicates the file has
been selected.
4.
Tap Add to playlist. Your phone then begins to search for
compatible Wi-Fi devices.
5.
Tap a destination device from the on-screen list. If you
desired device does not appear, tap Refresh.
Applications and Development
132
Amazon Kindle
2.
Using your 3G connection you can download books through the
Amazon Kindle™ application with no annual contracts, monthly
fees, and no hunting for hotspots.
Important!: You must be registered with Amazon Kindle to use this feature.
1.
From the Home screen, tap
• store provides access to the amazon store where you can shop for
millions of songs.
• player allows you to stream your remotely stored pre-purchased
music directly to your device.
3. From within the store option, select an on-screen category
(Bestsellers, New Releases, Browse By Genre, or Search
(Applications) ➔
Amazon MP3).
(Amazon Kindle).
2.
Enter your registered email address and password and tap
4.
5.
– or –
Follow the on-screen instructions.
6.
Amazon MP3
(Amazon MP3).
133
• Preview allows you to play an audio clip of the selected song.
Once you have located a desired song title or album, tap
[price] ➔ Buy.
Amazon MP3 is a digital music store owned and operated by
Amazon.com. Using you can download DRM-Free (digital rights
management) MP3 formatted songs and albums. For more
information, refer to “Amazon MP3” on page 121.
From the Home screen, tap
Tap the song title to listen to an audio preview. Tap the
song title again to stop playback.
Tap Create one now and follow the prompts.
1.
Follow the on-screen instructions to locate the desired
track or album.
Register.
3.
Select either store or player.
(Applications) ➔
• Pressing BUY allows you to purchase the song and download it to
your device’s microSD card.
Books
Calculator
Use Google Books to read over 3 million ebooks on the go.
Build your ebooks library in the cloud with Google Books: jump
right into a bestseller or select from nearly 3 million free ebooks.
Personalize the reader to your liking, pick up reading where you
left off on your phone or computer, and settle down with a great
book on your Android phone!
1.
From the Home screen, tap
(Applications) ➔
(Books).
2.
account and your device.
Tap
to begin searching for both free and paid
ebooks.
4.
1.
Follow the on-screen prompts to download the ebook to
your phone.
From the Home screen, tap
(Applications) ➔
(Calculator).
2.
Enter the first number using the numeric keys.
3.
Enter the operation for your calculation by touching the
If prompted, tap Turn sync on. This synchronizes your
books you have previously selected between your Books
3.
Using this feature you can use the phone as a calculator. The
calculator provides the basic arithmetic functions; addition,
subtraction, multiplication, and division. You can also use this as
a scientific calculator.
Plus, Minus, Multiplication, or Division key.
4.
Enter the next number.
5.
To view the result, tap the = (equals) key.
6.
Repeat steps 1 to 4 as many times as required.
Note: Place the screen in Landscape mode (sliding screen open) to reveal
additional scientific functions.
Applications and Development
134
Calendar
With the Calendar feature, you can consult the calendar by day,
week, or month, create events, and set an alarm to act as a
reminder. Google Calendar is built into the phone and
synchronizes both new and existing entries between your phone
and your online Google account.
Important!: You must have previously added an account (Facebook, Microsoft
Exchange ActiveSync, or Google) prior to using the Calendar.
1.
From the Home screen, tap
(Applications) ➔
• Delete: allows you to delete All events, All events before today, or
an individual event.
• Settings: displays a list of configurable settings.
For more information, refer to “Synchronizing Contacts” on
page 92.
To manually sync calendar events:
1.
Month: displays the Month view.
Week: displays the Week view.
Day: displays the Day view.
List: allows you to search for events for the selected Month, Week,
or Day. Or you can look for events for a future date.
2. Press
and select one of the following options:
•
•
•
•
135
Search: allows you to search within current events.
Create: creates a new Event.
Go to: displays a specific date.
Today: displays the date highlighted with a Blue box highlighting
the date.
and then tap
➔ Accounts and
sync.
2.
Locate the email account containing the events you wish to
synchronize.
(Calendar). The Calendar displays four tabs:
•
•
•
•
➔
Press
3.
Tap
within the adjacent account field to reveal the
account’s synchronization settings screen.
4.
Tap Sync Calendar to activate the synchronization of
calendar events between your device and the remote
exchange server. A green checkmark indicates the feature
is enabled.
Call logs
Camera
The Call log lists all the calls missed, received, or dialed.
For more information, refer to “Call Logs Tab” on page 66.
Contacts
The default storage location for saving phone numbers to your
Contacts List is your phone’s built-in memory.
Use your 5.0 megapixel camera feature to produce photos in a JPEG
format.
Note: An SD card must be inserted before the Camera will take and store
photos.
䊳
From the Home screen, tap
For more information, refer to “Contacts List” on page 82.
Camcorder
Use your built-in camera lens to activate the camcorder and
record videos that are stored on the microSD card.
䊳
From the Home screen, tap
(Applications) ➔
(Camcorder) to activate the camcorder mode.
(Applications) ➔
(Camera).
For more information, refer to “Using the Camera” on page 112.
Car Home
Configures the phone’s user interface to be easier to use while you are
driving.
Warning!: Please use this application responsibly.
Note: An SD card must be inserted before the Camcorder will take and store
video.
For more information, refer to “Using the Camcorder” on
page 120.
1.
From the Home screen, tap
(Applications) ➔
(Car Home).
2.
Read the on-screen disclaimer and tap Accept.
The screen is laid out with the most common on-screen applications
available for quick access.
To reset your phone’s interface back to the default layout:
䊳
From the Car Home screen, tap Exit.
Applications and Development
136
Desk Home
DriveSmart
Configures the phone’s user interface to mimic a desktop layout.
䊳
From the Home screen, tap
(Applications) ➔
(Desk Home).
The screen is laid out with commonly used on-screen applications
available for quick access.
To reset your phone’s interface back to the default layout:
䊳
From the Desk Home screen, tap Exit.
Downloads
From the Home screen, tap
(Applications) ➔
(Downloads).
䊳
Tap an available file category tab (Internet downloads or
Other downloads) and select the desired file.
137
Warning!: Using your mobile device while driving may divert your attention
from your responsibilities as a driver, result in an accident or other
injury and could be a violation of law.
1.
From the Home screen, tap
DRIVE
SMART
Provides quick access to tabs containing a list of your current
downloaded files (Internet and Other).
1.
The DriveSmart application can be used to reduce distractions from
your phone by silencing notifications, routing calls to voicemail and
customizing auto responses to both callers and text message
respondents notifying them that your driving.
2.
(Applications) ➔
(DriveSmart).
Tap OK and begin configuring the on-screen application
options:
• Upgrade to DriveSmart Plus allows you to upgrade the phone’s
standard version to a more robust version of the application.
• DriveSmart enables or disables the DriveSmart application.
• Enable Bluetooth activates Bluetooth and routes all incoming calls
to your handsfree device.
• Enable Auto Response enables or disable an automatic SMS text
message response to all incoming text messages notifying users
that you are currently driving and can not answer a text.
• Edit Auto Response allows you to edit the default text message
response or create your own. After editing the response tap OK.
3.
Press
to return to the previous screen.
Email
Email enables you to review and create email using most email
services. The device alerts you when you receive an email
message.
For more information, refer to “Email” on page 104.
Facebook
This application allows you to both access your Facebook page
and synchronize contacts and posting between your phone and
Fcacebook website. For more information, refer to “Get Friends”
on page 93.
1.
From the Home screen, tap
(Applications) ➔
(Facebook).
2.
Enter your Email and Password information and tap Login.
Gallery
The Gallery is where you view photos and play back videos. For
photos, you can also perform basic editing tasks, view a
slideshow, set photos as wallpaper or caller image, and share as
a picture message.
䊳
From the Home screen, tap
(Applications) ➔
(Gallery).
For more information, refer to “The Gallery” on page 122.
Google Mail
Google Mail (Gmail) is a web-based email service. Gmail is
configured when you first set up your phone. Depending on your
synchronization settings, Gmail can automatically synchronize
with your Gmail account on the web.
For more information, refer to “Using Google Mail” on page 110.
Files
Organize and store data, images, and more in your own personal
file folders. Files are stored to the memory card in separate (user
defined) folders.
䊳
From the Home screen, tap
(Applications) ➔
(Files).
For more information, refer to “Files” on page 121.
Applications and Development
138
Google Search
Latitude
Google Search is a web-based search engine that uses
text-based queries to search for content on web pages.
1.
From the Home screen, tap
(Applications) ➔
(Google Search) and enter the search text.
– or –
Touch the microphone on the Google Search bar and say
Google Latitude allows you and your friends share locations and
status messages with each other. It also lets you send instant
messages and emails, make phone calls, and get directions to
your friends’ locations.
Important!: You must sign in to your Google account, enable Wi-Fi, and
enable the Location feature before you can use this application.
For more information, refer to “Wi-Fi settings” on page 180.
the search information. For more information, refer to
“Search Key” on page 28. For more information, refer to
1.
INCEPTION
Confirm the preloaded memory card is in the SD slot. For
If desired, tap Allow & Share to share your current location
3.
Tap Wi-Fi connection to turn on Wi-Fi if it is not already
with your Google friends and contacts.
enabled.
more information, refer to “Installing the microSD Memory
4.
Card” on page 9.
2.
3.
From the Home screen, tap
player application.
139
You are now set up and ready to use Latitude.
Log into Media Hub (required the first time you tap the
page 123. The movie plays back within the built-in video
Tap the Enable location history field, then tap Detect your
location to enable the Location feature.
(Inception).
icon). For more information, refer to “Media Hub” on
(Applications) ➔
2.
This movie is preloaded on the SD card included with this device.
1.
From the Home screen, tap
(Latitude).
“Using Google Search” on page 28.
5.
From the latitude friends page, press
and then tap an
available application option such as: Refresh friends,
Check in, See map, Add friends, or Settings.
Layar
• Layers: displays Layars entries from the following categories:
– Search layers: allows you to search for your own Layar location.
– Featured: displays featured Layar locations.
– Popular: displays the most popular Layar locations.
– New: displays new Layar locations.
– Categories: search for your own Layar location by categories.
• Search: search for your own Layar location.
• Settings: provides additional Layar features such as: Options,
Account, About Layar, and Intro.
The Layar Reality Browser shows what is around you by
displaying real time digital information on top of the real world as
seen through your mobile phone. This technology is called
Augmented Reality. Layar augments the real world as seen
through your mobile phone, based on your location.
How does Layar’s Augmented Reality work?
Layar works by using a combination of the mobile phone’s
camera, compass and GPS data to identify the user’s location
and field of view, retrieve data based on those geographical
coordinates, and overlay that data over the view.
Important!: You must activate GPS to use this application.
1.
From the Home screen, tap
(Applications) ➔
Maps
Google Maps allow you to track your current location, view
real-time traffic issues, and view detailed destination directions.
There is also a search tool included to help you locate places of
interest or a specific address. You can view locations on a vector
or aerial map, or you can view locations at the street level.
(Layar).
2.
Read the Layar terms and privacy statement and tap
Accept. Layar initializes your favorites and performs
updates. The displayed tabs provide the following
information:
Important!: Before using Google Maps you must have an active data (3G) or
connection. The Maps application does not cover every country
or city.
䊳
From the Home screen, tap
(Applications) ➔
(Maps).
• Favorites: displays your favorite designated Layar locations.
• Recent: displays your recently opened layers.
Applications and Development
140
Enabling a Location source
Opening Maps
Before you use Google Maps and find your location or search for
places of interest, you must enable a location source. To enable
the location source you must enable the wireless network, or
enable the GPS satellites.
1.
From the Home screen, tap
(Applications) ➔
(Maps).
2.
Locate the top row of the applications to access additional
options:
Important!: The more location determining functions are enabled, the more
accurate the determination will be of your position.
1.
Press
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔
Location and security.
2.
Tap Use wireless networks to enable GPS to determine
location based on nearby cell towers.
3.
Tap Use GPS satellites to enable the GPS satellite.
4.
Tap Use sensor aiding to enhance positioning and save
power using sensors.
Tip: When using Google Maps you can turn on Enable GPS satellites.
Selecting GPS satellites allows you to locate places of interest at the
street-level. However, this also requires a clear view of the sky and uses
more battery power.
141
• Search Maps: allows you to search for a place of interest.
• Places: provides access to the places menu where you can quickly
locate a business or person, find out more information about a
business, see coupons, public responses, and more (page 151).
Locate and tap one of the listed places (Restaurants, Coffee, Bars,
Hotels, Attractions, ATMs, Gas Stations, or Add your own place.)
A list of places within this category displays.
• Layers: allows you to switch map views:
– Traffic: (available only in selected areas) Real-time traffic conditions are
displayed over roads as color-coded lines. Each color represents how
fast the traffic is moving.
– Satellite: Maps uses the same satellite data as Google Earth. Satellite
images are not real-time. Google Earth acquires the best imagery
available, most of which is approximately one to three years old.
– Terrain: combines a topographical view of the area’s terrain with the
current map location.
– Transit Lines: allows you view added transit lines on the current map.
– Latitude: allows you to see your friend's locations and share your
location with them.
– My Maps: allows you display pre-saved map entries.
– Bicycling: allows you view bicycling trails on the current map.
– Wikipedia: allows you view Wikipedia geo-tagged entries on the
current map.
– Clear Map: clears any current map overlays or selections.
• My Location: when tapped, the location displays on the map with a
blinking blue dot.
3. Press
and select one of the following options:
• Search: allows you to search for a place of interest.
• Directions: displays navigation directions to a location from a
starting point.
• My Places: marks favorite locations on the map. These items are
automatically synchronized with maps.
• Clear Map: after viewing or following directions, this option resets
the map.
• Latitude: lets you and your friends share locations and status
messages with each other. It also lets you send instant messages
and emails, make phone calls, and get directions to your friends’
locations.
• More:
– Labs: a testing ground for experimental features that are not ready to
use publically.
– Cache Settings: allows you to alter cache settings such as: Prefetch
on mobile and Clear map title cache.
– Help: uses the browser to display a searchable Google Mobile Help
screen.
– Terms, Privacy & Notices: displays the Terms and Conditions, Privacy
Policy, or Legal Notices information. Select the desired information from
the pop-up menu.
– About: displays general information about Google maps such as
Version, Platform, Locale, Total data sent, Total data received, Free
memory, etc.
Market
Android Market provides access to downloadable applications
and games to install on your phone. Android Market also allows
you to provide feedback and comments about an application, or
flag an application that might be incompatible with your phone.
Accessing the Market
1.
From the Home screen, tap
(Applications) ➔
(Market).
2.
If not already logged in with your Google account, tap Next.
3.
Tap Sign in and enter your Google account information.
4.
Tap Accept to agree to the Android Market terms of
service.
For more information, refer to “Downloading a New Google
Application” on page 143.
Applications and Development
142
Downloading a New Google Application
To download a new application, you will need to use your Google
account to sign in to Android Market. The Android Market home
page provides several ways to find applications. The home page
features applications and includes a list of item applications by
category, a list of games, a link to search, and a link to My
downloads.
1.
From the Home screen, tap
5.
6.
Important!: If the selected application requires access to data or control of a
function on your phone, Market displays the information the
application will access.
Tap OK if you agree to the conditions of the application. Once you
tap OK on this screen you are responsible for using this
application on the phone and the amount of data it uses. Use this
feature with caution.
4.
143
Tap Install.
After the item is downloaded and installed on your phone,
the content download icon
Browse through the categories, find an application you're
Read the application descriptions.
Check the progress of the current download by opening
the Notifications panel.
7.
appears in the
notification area of the status bar.
interested in, and tap the name.
3.
If prompted, follow the on-screen instructions to pay for
the application.
(Applications) ➔
(Market).
2.
Note: Use caution with applications which request access to any personal
data, functions, or significant amounts of data usage times.
8.
On the Android Market screen, press
and then tap
My apps, tap the installed application in the list, and then
tap Open.
Tip: The newly downloaded application displays on the Home screen or other
selected panel.
Note: A data plan is required to use this feature. Charges may apply. Please
contact your service provider for further details.
Launching an Installed Google Application
1.
From the Home screen, tap
(Applications).
2.
Tap the newly installed application. This application is
typically located on the last Applications page.
Android Development
This device can be used for Android application development.
You can write applications in the SDK and install them on this
device, then run the applications using the hardware, system,
and network.
Manage applications
This feature allows you to manage and remove installed
applications. You can also view the amount of memory or
resources used as well as the remaining memory and resources
for each of the applications on your phone and clear the data,
cache, or defaults.
䊳
Unknown sources
Press
➔
(Settings) ➔
Clearing application cache and data
Press
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔
Applications ➔ Manage applications.
2.
Tap an application in which to clear the cache or data.
3.
Tap Force stop, Clear data, Clear cache, or Clear defaults.
and then tap
(Settings) ➔
You can uninstall any application you downloaded and installed
from Android Market.
1.
Applications ➔ Unknown sources.
Press
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔
Applications ➔ Manage applications.
Unknown sources displays a check mark to indicate it is
active.
and then tap
Uninstalling third-party applications
This feature can be used for Android application development.
The feature allows developers to install non-Market applications.
1.
➔
Applications ➔ Manage applications.
1.
Warning!: Android Dev devices are not intended for non-developer endusers. Because the device can be configured with system
software not provided by or supported by Google or any other
company, end-users operate these devices at their own risk.
Press
2.
Tap the third-party application, and from the Application
info screen, tap Uninstall.
Applications and Development
144
Media Hub
Memo options
Samsung Media Hub is your one stop for the hottest movie and TV
content. You can rent or purchase your favorite content and watch
from the convenience of anywhere.
䊳
From the Home screen, tap
(Applications) ➔
(Media Hub).
For more information, refer to “Media Hub” on page 123.
Memo
This feature allows you to create a memo.
1.
From the Home screen, tap
1.
• Create: allows you to create a memo.
• Maximize: remove the bent, lower-right corner of the memo page
and to maximize the information display.
• Delete: allows you to delete one or more memos.
• Search: allows you to search within the current set of memos.
2. Touch and hold the memo then select Send via and choose
the method to send this memo: Bluetooth, Email, or
Messaging.
(Memo).
Tap Create memo to compose the new memo.
3.
Press
to close the on-screen keyboard/keypad and
change the background color.
4.
Tap Save.
For more information, refer to “Text Input Methods” on page 70.
3.
From the memo list, tap the upper-left edit button and
select a color for the memo’s background, then tap Save.
Messaging
This application allows you to use the Short Message Service
(SMS) to send and receive short text messages to and from other
mobile phones. You can also use the Multi Media Service (MMS)
to create multimedia messages to send and receive from other
mobile phones.
䊳
From the Home screen, tap
(Messaging).
145
and select
one of the following options:
(Applications) ➔
2.
While viewing the list of Memos, press
(Applications) ➔
For more information, refer to “Messages” on page 98.
Mini Diary
1.
This application allows you to create a mini diary where you can
add a photo, and text to describe an event or other memorable
life event.
1.
From the Home screen, tap
Mini Diary settings
(Applications) ➔
Tap Done to store the new text.
3.
From the main Diary listings page, press
3.
Tap Selected city and tap the city for which you are
documenting this entry.
Tap Auto update if you want the settings to automatically
update.
Deleting a Mini Diary entry
1.
From the Home screen, tap
2.
Press
photo) and select a weather condition from the list to
describe the weather conditions for this entry.
5.
4.
event and touch the source. Selections are: Camera or
Tap the weather data icon in the upper, left corner (over the
Tap Save.
➔ Settings.
2.
Tap Tap to add photo field to add a photo for this diary
Images.
4.
(Applications) ➔
(Mini Diary).
(Mini Diary). Any diary entries display in a list.
• If a diary already exists, tap Create diary.
2. Tap Tap to create memo to add text to your new memo.
From the Home screen, tap
(Applications) ➔
.
(Applications) ➔
.
➔ Delete all.
Mini Diary options
1.
From the Home screen, tap
2.
Select a diary.
3.
Press
and select one of the following options:
• Create: creates a new diary entry.
• Delete: deletes the displayed entry.
• Publish: charges may apply when publishing (exporting). Touch Yes
then select Facebook or MySpace.
Applications and Development
146
• Change photo: replaces the photo in this entry by allowing you to
take another photo or use another image.
• Delete photo: deletes the photo from this entry when you touch Yes
to confirm.
Music Player
Music Player allows you to play music files that you have stored
on your microSD card. You can also create playlists.
䊳
From the Home screen, tap
(Applications) ➔
The differences between My Account and My Device are these:
• My Account: check Activity, Set Alerts, review Billing, and review
your current Plan and services.
• My Device: Personalize settings, Quick Tools, Support, and Storage
& Battery.
Tip: Use the Menu key to toggle between My Account and My Device.
1.
From the Home screen, tap
For more information, refer to “Music Player” on page 125.
My Account
This option provides you with account specific information such
as your current activity, billing information, Plan Services
information. You can also set alerts for minute or message usage,
payment reminder, or power saver.
Note: You may be prompted to log into the Android Market to receive the
latest version of the T-Mobile My Account application.
147
(Applications) ➔
(My Account).
(Music Player).
2.
Read the on-screen information and tap OK.
The initial screen displays four tabs: Activity, Alerts, Billing, and
Plans Services.
Activity
The Activity tab displays your current minute and message
activity. You can view what percentage of minutes were used as
well as the number of messages used for a particular start date.
Set Alerts
From this screen you can activate alerts to notify you of the
following:
• Minute Usage: tracks the number of minutes used and remaining
in your plan.
– Minute Usage Reminder: sends an alert when the number of minutes
used reaches 75 percent of the total available minutes in the plan.
– Over Limit Alert: sends an alert when usage exceeds your plan’s total
available minutes.
• Message Usage: tracks the number of messages used and
remaining in your plan. If you plan includes unlimited messages this
setting does not apply.
• Data Usage: tracks data used and remaining in your plan. If you
plan includes unlimited data usage this setting does not apply.
• Payment Reminder: alerts when your bill is due.
• Power Saver: sends an alert when the battery level reaches 30
percent efficiency. The alert displays in the notification window. This
alert is automatically set to On.
Billing
This provides a billing summary.
Plan
This screen displays specific information and charges for your
current plan and services. The screen also displays additional
services information and charges.
My Device
Use the My Device application to configure device settings, view
support information, personalize your CallerTunes, Ringtones, or
Wallpapers, or view battery storage information.
1.
From the Home screen, tap
(Applications) ➔
(My Device).
2.
Read the on-screen information and tap OK.
Tip: Use the Menu key (
) to toggle between My Account and My Device.
The differences between My Account and My Device are these:
• My Account: check Activity, Set Alerts, review Billing, and review
your current Plan and services.
• My Device: Personalize settings, Quick Tools, Support, and Storage
& Battery.
The initial screen displays four tabs: Personalize, Quick Tools,
Support, and Storage Battery.
Personalize My Device
Using this menu you can personalize CallerTunes, Ringtone, and
Wallpapers.
• CallerTunes: personalize caller tunes.
Applications and Development
148
• Ringtones: you can personalize your phone’s ringtones when you
Download HiFi Ringers, view Ringtone Subscriptions, access Voice
Sounds, and access Phone Ringtones.
• Wallpapers: you can personalize your phone’s background by
selecting wallpapers from the Shop, Gallery, Live Wallpaper, or the
Wallpaper Gallery.
Quick Tools
Quick Tools is a shortcut that allows you to activate Wi-Fi,
activate and configure Bluetooth, activate and configure Data
Roaming features, activate and configure GPS features, adjust
the screen Brightness, set the Screen Timeout for the display,
and view Phone Information.
Navigation
Google Maps Navigation (Beta) is an internet-connected
turn-by-turn, GPS navigation system with voice guidance.
Caution!: Traffic data is not real-time and directions may be wrong,
dangerous, prohibited, or involve ferries.
Important!: To receive better GPS signals, avoid using your device in the
following conditions:
- inside a building or between buildings
- in a tunnel or underground passage
- in poor weather
- around high-voltage or electromagnetic fields
- in a vehicle with tinted windows
Support
Displays support information My Account Feedback, T-Mobile
Forums, T-Mobile on Twitter, and T-Mobile® Tech Assist™.
Storage & Battery
From this tab you can view Memory storage information for the
phone or memory card. You can also view the battery level
percentage and other information.
䊳
From the Home screen, tap
Enabling GPS Location
1.
Press
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔
Location and security
2.
Tap Use GPS satellites. A green check mark indicates the
GPS location feature is enabled.
149
(Applications) ➔
(Navigation).
Navigation options
1.
From the Home screen, tap
Navigation Map options
➔
(Navigation).
The navigation application can be configured from the
main screen.
2.
Read the on-screen disclaimer and tap Accept.
3.
Choose from the following on-screen options:
• Driving/Walking: configures the method of travel. Selection of
Walking would negate the need to track traffic jams and
obstructions.
– Driving mode enables the Route options feature: allows you to
configure your Route options such as: Avoid highways or Avoid tolls.
• Map: enables the on-screen real-time map functionality.
• Speak Destination: allows you to use the voice recognition feature
to search for matching locations in your area.
• Type Destination: allows you to manually enter a destination
address (via the on-screen keypad).
• Contacts: allows you to receive turn-by-turn directions to the
address stored for a selected Contacts entry.
• Starred Places: allows you to obtain directions to locations that
have been starred within Google maps (maps.google.com).
Once on the map screen, you can access the following features:
• Destination: returns you to the previous Navigation options screen.
• Search by voice: Speak your destination instead of typing
(English only).
• Layers: allows you to switch map views:
• Traffic view: (available only in selected areas) Real-time traffic
conditions are displayed over roads as color-coded lines. Each color
represents how fast the traffic is moving.
• Satellite: Maps uses the same satellite data as Google Earth.
Satellite images are not real-time. Google Earth acquires the best
imagery available, most of which is approximately one to three
years old.
• Parking: displays parking information relative to your current
location.
• Gas Stations: displays gas station location relative to your current
location.
• ATMs & Banks: displays ATM and Bank locations relative to your
current location.
• Restaurants: displays restaurant and eatery locations relative to
your current location.
From within the Navigation map view, press
for additional
options:
• Search: manually search for a destination address, place, name of
business, or even a type of business.
Applications and Development
150
• Set Destination: returns you to the navigation options screen where
you can access a destination by either Speaking, Typing, or selecting
from a Contacts entry or Starred Place.
• Layers: allows you to switch map views. See previous description.
• Mute: allows you to mute the audio readout and directional
information.
• Exit Navigation: terminates the application.
• More: provides additional application information such as: Help and
Term, Privacy & Notices.
Places
Google Places displays company logos on a layer of Google
Maps. When viewing an area you can quickly locate a business
or person, find out more information about the business, see
coupons, public responses, and more.
1.
From the Home screen, tap
(Applications) ➔
(Places).
2.
Use the Find places field to manually enter a desired place
or choose from among the various categories. Matches are
Caution!: Navigation is a beta product. Use caution.
News and Weather
1.
From the Home screen, tap
filtered by those closest to your current location.
3.
Nearby, or Add your own place.) A list of places within this
(News and Weather).
2.
category displays.
Select from any of the available tabs: Weather, Top Stories,
U.S., Sports, and Entertainment.
4.
2.
Press
and then tap Settings.
Tap an available option: Weather settings, News settings,
Refresh settings, and Application version.
Tap the Maps icon (upper-right) to launch the related maps
feature.
To access the settings:
1.
Locate and tap one of the listed places (Restaurants,
Coffee, Bars, Attractions, ATMs, Gas Stations, Explore
(Applications) ➔
5.
Press
and then tap Latitude. The functions of this
application are similar to those of the Navigation
application, but work along with the Latitude service
where you can share your location with your chosen
Google friends.
151
Settings
3.
This icon navigates to the sound and phone settings for your
phone. It includes such settings as: display, security, memory,
and any extra settings associated with your phone.
䊳
From the Home screen, tap
(Applications) ➔
Swype tips
Using the SwypeTips application you can watch a video or start a
tutorial that teaches you how to use Swype most efficiently.
䊳
(Settings).
➔
and then tap
(Settings).
For more information, refer to “Changing Your Settings” on
page 180.
Slacker
Slacker offers free, internet radio for mobile phones.
1.
From the Home screen, tap
(Applications) ➔
For more information, refer to “Swype Text Entry Tips” on
page 72.
T-Mobile TV HD
T-Mobile TV HD is an application that allows you to get live TV
and Video on Demand.
䊳
Important!: You must register and create a free account prior to using this
service.
Enter your Email address and password.
– or –
Tap Create Account if you have not created an account.
From the Home screen, tap
(Applications) ➔
(T-Mobile TV HD).
(Applications) ➔
(Slacker).
2.
From the Home screen, tap
(Swype Tips).
– or –
Press
Begin selecting the music you want to listen to.
For more information, refer to “T-Mobile TV HD” on page 128.
Talk
You can instant message with Google Talk. Google Talk allows
you to communicate with other people who are also connected
with Google Talk on the phone or on the web.
䊳
From the Home screen, tap
(Applications) ➔
(Talk).
For more information, refer to “Google Talk” on page 111.
Applications and Development
152
Task Manager
Sometimes your phone might seem to slow down over time, and the
biggest reason for this are background applications. These are
applications that were not properly closed or shutdown and are still
active but minimized. The Task Manager not only lets you see which
of these applications are still active in the background but also easily
lets you choose which applications are left running and which are
closed.
Shutting Down Applications
䊳
From the Home screen, tap
(Applications) ➔
(Task Manager).
• Storage displays a visual graph indicating the available and used
space within the internal phone storage location and External SD
card.
• Help provides additional battery saving techniques.
4. From the Active applications tab, tap Exit to close selected
applications or tap Exit all to close all background running
applications.
TeleNav GPS
TeleNav GPS Navigator is a driving aid that uses both audible and
visual directions for GPS navigation.
1.
– or –
Press and hold
(Applications) ➔
(TeleNav GPS).
then tap Task Manager. This screen
2.
contains the following tabs:
• Active applications display those currently active applications
running on your phone.
• Downloaded displays any installed packages or applications from
the Market that are taking up memory space. Tap Uninstall to
remove them from your phone.
• RAM displays the amount of current RAM (Random Access
Memory) currently being used and allow you too Clear Memory.
153
From the Home screen, tap
If prompted, read the GPS Settings notification, tap the
GPS Settings button and follow the on-screen prompts to
enable the necessary GPS location feature.
3.
Read the agreement and tap Accept to accept the terms, or
tap Exit to close the window. Wait for the application to
load required first-time use files.
4.
Select to either Upgrade to Premium or use the Continue in
5.
Enter the required information for TeleNav.
Free Mode service.
ThinkFree Office
Video Chat
ThinkFree Office Mobile for Android is a Microsoft Office
compatible office suite. This application provides a central place
for managing your documents online or offline.
The application can also open Adobe PDF (Portable Document
Format) files.
1.
From the Home screen, tap
(Applications) ➔
This is a mobile video sharing and 2-way video calling service.
This application also lets you record and share experiences with
your friends, family, and your favorite social networks.
1.
Read the End User License Agreement, then tap Accept if
2.
On its initial launch, tap Activate now.Three tabs display:
• Home: displays the introduction to ThinkFree Office and lists a short
description of each of the tabs and what type of information they
provide.
• My Docs: This is where you keep your documents on this device.
You can manage documents, or send them to others, and upload
the documents to ThinkFree Online.
• Online: This provides your thinkfree.com online storage
information. You can also share your documents to others without
using email attachments.
Fill in the Email address, Username, and Password, then
tap Sign up to create your new account.
3.
you agree with the terms of use.
3.
(Applications) ➔
(Video Chat) ➔ Sign up.
(ThinkFree Office).
2.
From the Home screen, tap
Follow the on-screen instructions. For more information,
visit: http://qik.com/.
To adjust application settings:
1.
Press
2.
Choose from any of the following options:
and then tap Settings.
• Sharing allows you to setup sharing preferences.
– Facebook: set up your Qik credentials for Facebook posting of videos.
– Twitter: set up your Twitter account sharing preferences.
– YouTube: set up your Qik credentials for YouTube posting of videos.
– Contacts: set up your contact sharing parameters.
Applications and Development
154
• Location allows you to select the level of location accuracy that is
embedded into your Qik videos. When posting or sharing Qik video
information with others, you can decide how accurate the related
location information can be. Choose from: Off, City level, Street
level, or Track live.
• Video recording quality allows you to assign a video quality to the
outbound video. Choose from: Low, Normal, or High.
• About displays the version information for the Qik Video Chat
application.
Recording Qik Video
1.
From the Home screen, tap
(Applications) ➔
(Video Chat) ➔ Record & Share.
2.
Read the one-time disclaimer describing the public nature
Videos
The Video Player application plays video files stored on your
microSD card.
䊳
Tap Record to start recording.
– or –
Tap Stop to end the recording process.
4.
Enter a title for your video segment and select those
services you wish to use to distribute your video.
• Services such as Twitter, Facebook, YouTube, SMS, and E-mail ask
that you select a recipient for your video segment.
155
(Applications) ➔
(Videos).
For more information, refer to “Using the Video Player” on
page 123.
Visual Voicemail
Visual Voicemail enables users to view a list of people who left a
voicemail message, and listen to the any message they want
without being limited to chronological order.
䊳
of your videos and tap OK.
3.
From the Home screen, tap
From the Home screen, tap
(Applications) ➔
(Visual Voicemail).
For more information, refer to “Visual Voicemail” on page 17.
Voice Dialer
Voice dialer is a voice recognition software used to activate a
wide variety of functions on your phone.
䊳
From the Home screen, tap
(Applications) ➔
(Voice Dialer).
For more information, refer to “Using the Voice Dialer” on
page 55.
Voice Recorder
Voice Search
The Voice Recorder allows you to record an audio file up to one
minute long and then immediately send it as a message.
1.
From the Home screen, tap
(Applications) ➔
(Voice Recorder).
2.
Tap the Record icon to record an audio file.
3.
Tap Stop to stop recording. The file automatically saves to
The Voice Search feature is a voice-activated application that
allows you to tell the phone what to search for and then the
phone activates a Google search based on what you said.
For more information, refer to “Using Additional Voice Search
Functions” on page 29.
1.
2.
Press
and then tap Share and select a method in
decline.
Bluetooth, Email, or Gmail. Refer to each specific section,
recording.
• Additional menu options include Delete, Rename, and Settings.
Select Agree if you want Google to use location for
improved search results and other services, or Disagree to
which to share this audio file. Selections are: Messaging,
depending on the method you selected to send this voice
(Applications) ➔
(Voice Search).
the Voice list.
4.
From the Home screen, tap
3.
At the Speak now screen speak your search command
slowly and clearly.
Google searches for the information and displays related
information in the browser.
Applications and Development
156
Web
Write and Go
Open the browser to start surfing the web. The browser is fully
optimized and comes with advanced functionality to enhance the
Internet browsing feature on your phone.
䊳
From the Home screen, tap
(Applications) ➔
Use write and go to job down an idea, then decide what format
you want to use to save, send, or post it. You can send as a
message, send to your Gmail account, Update to Facebook, save
it in the Calendar or as a memo.
1.
(Web).
From the Home screen, tap
For more information, refer to “Web” on page 159.
Wi-Fi Calling
2.
From the Home screen, tap
(Applications) ➔
(Wi-Fi Calling).
For more information, refer to “Wi-Fi Calling” on page 59.
Note: After you complete a connection to an active Wi-Fi network, the Wi-Fi
Calling feature will automatically be enabled.
Compose the text then select one of the following:
• Send: sends as a Message or sends to your Gmail (or other email)
account.
• Update status: posts this text to your Facebook, MySpace, or
Twitter account.
• Save: saves the text to the calendar or as a memo.
This feature allows you to make calls using a Wi-Fi over the
T-Mobile network.
䊳
(Applications) ➔
(Write and go).
YouTube
YouTube is a video sharing website on which users can upload
and share videos, and view them in MPEG-4 format.
1.
From the Home screen, tap
(Applications) ➔
(YouTube).
2.
When the screen loads you can begin searching and
viewing posted videos.
157
To configure YouTube Settings:
䊳
Press
and then tap Settings and configure the
following parameters:
To watch a high quality video:
䊳
While playing a video, press
and then tap Settings ➔
High quality on mobile.
• High quality on mobile, when enabled, allows you to start all
videos in high quality mode while you are connected to a mobile
network.
• Caption front size allows you to set the font size used by onscreen captions. Choose from: Small, Medium, Large, or Extra
Large.
• Clear search history allows you to clear any previous YouTube
searches from appearing within the search box.
• SafeSearch filtering allows you to configure block settings for
videos containing restricted content. This option blocks these
videos from appearing within your search results. Choose from:
Don’t filter, Moderate, or Strict blocking.
• Help provides answers to most YouTube questions.
• Feedback allows you to provide user feedback to YouTube.
• Google Mobile Terms of Service
• YouTube Terms of Service
• Google Mobile Privacy Policy
• YouTube Privacy Policy
• Application version displays the software version for the current
YouTube application.
Applications and Development
158
Section 10: Connections
Your phone is equipped with features that allow you to quickly
connect to the web.
Web
Your phone is equipped with a Google browser to navigate the
mobile web. This section explains how to navigate the browser
and use the basic features.
Accessing the Internet
To access the Browser:
䊳
From the Home screen, tap
(Applications) ➔
(Web).
Important!: To properly access the T-Mobile web2go area, you must first
disable any current Wi-Fi connection.
Note: If prompted with an on-screen message about options, tap CANCEL to
continue onto the web2go screen.
159
Homepage
When you access the Browser, the web2go home page displays
the following topics:
• Google Search: allows you to quickly search for online topics using
the Google search engine.
• Advertisement: provides an on-screen advertisement bubble
providing suggested phone applications.
• T-Mobile Mall: provides access to the T-Mobile Mall website.
• Yahoo Mail: displays the Sign in for Yahoo Mail. Register by sending a
text message with the word START to 92500 if you are not already
registered.
• Facebook: displays the Facebook Log in. Sign up from this page if you
are not already registered.
• AccuWeather: based on your location settings, AccuWeather displays
the current weather conditions.
• CNN: displays current news headlines and more.
• ESPN: displays current sports news headlines and more.
• E! Online: displays current entertainment news headlines and more.
• Mapquest: provides access to the online mapquest site.
• Yelp: provides access to Yelp which is an online urban city guide that
helps people find cool places to eat, shop, drink, relax and play. Its the
fun and easy way to find, review and talk about what's great in your
world.
• What’s Now: provides quick access to a variety of different
entertainment and shopping websites.
• My Account: provides quick access to your account information.
Note: If the Automatic brightness feature is enabled (Settings ➔ Display ➔
Brightness), you can not modify the browser’s brightness setting.
• Refresh: reloads the current page.
• Forward: forwards the browser to another web page.
• More: displays the following additional options:
– Add bookmark: allows you to add a URL to your bookmark list.
– Add shortcut to Home: adds a shortcut to your web2go homepage on
your phone’s Home screen.
– Add RSS feeds: adds RSS feeds to your browser.
– Find on page: allows you to search in the current page.
– Page info: displays information about the selected page.
– Share page: allows you to share the page using Gmail or as a
message.
– Downloads: displays the download history.
– Settings: allows you to change the way you view your web pages by
changing these options. For more information, refer to “Browser
Options” on page 160.
Navigating with the Browser
1.
To select an item, tap an entry.
2.
To scroll through a website, sweep the screen with your
finger in an up or down motion.
3.
To return to the previous page, press
.
Browser Options
1.
From the home page, press
to access the following
options:
• New window: displays a new window so you can browse multiple
URLs. For more information, refer to “Adding and Deleting
Windows” on page 161.
• Windows: displays a list of the windows you have open.
• Brightness setting: allows you to manually adjust the screen
brightness.
Entering a URL
You can access a website quickly by entering the URL. Websites
are optimized for viewing on your phone.
To enter a URL and go to a particular website:
䊳
Tap the URL field at the top of the screen, enter the URL
Connections
160
and tap
.
4.
windows and tap an entry to launch the selected Internet
Search the Internet
To perform an internet search using keywords, follow these
steps:
1.
Tap the Google search field, enter the keyword(s) to
search using the on-screen keypad and tap
(Search). A list of search results displays.
2.
Tap a link to view the website.
Adding and Deleting Windows
You can have up to eight Internet windows open at one time. To
add a new window, follow these steps:
1.
From your browser, press
and then tap New window.
– or –
Press
and then tap Windows ➔ New window.
2.
A new browser window displays.
3.
Press
and then tap Windows to see a list of all open
windows.
Note: This icon will display a number that corresponds to the current number
of active browser windows,
161
Scroll across the screen to view the currently active
window.
5.
Tap
next to the listing to delete the window.
Using Bookmarks
While navigating a website, you can bookmark a site to quickly
and easily access it at a future time. The URLs (website
addresses) of the bookmarked sites display in the Bookmarks
page. From the Bookmarks page you can also view your Most
visited websites and view your History.
1.
From the Home webpage, tap
. The Bookmarks page
displays. Additional pages include Most visited and History.
2.
Press
to display the following options:
• Bookmark last-viewed page: Creates a new bookmark for the
last webpage that you viewed.
• List/Thumbnail view: Select Thumbnail view (default) to view a
thumbnail of the webpage with the name listed, or select List view
to view a list of the bookmarks with Name and URL listed.
• Create folder: Creates a new folder in which to store new
bookmarks.
3. Tap a bookmark to view the webpage, or touch and hold a
bookmark for the following options:
• Open: Opens the webpage of the selected bookmark.
• Open in new window: Opens the webpage in a new window.
• Edit bookmark: Allows you to edit the name or URL of the
bookmark.
• Add shortcut to Home: Adds a shortcut to the bookmarked
webpage to your phone’s Home screen.
• Share link: Allows you to share a URL address via Bluetooth,
Facebook, Email, Gmail, or Messaging.
• Copy link URL: Allows you to copy the URL address to use in a
message.
• Delete bookmark: Allows you to delete a bookmark.
• Set as homepage: Sets the bookmark to your new homepage.
Adding Bookmarks
➔ Add.
1.
From the Home webpage, tap
2.
Use the on-screen keypad to enter the name of the
bookmark and the URL.
3.
Assign a folder location. Home is the default.
4.
Tap OK. The new save page now appears on the
Bookmarks page.
Editing Bookmarks
1.
From the Bookmarks page, touch and hold the bookmark
you want to edit.
2.
Tap Edit bookmark.
3.
Use the on-screen keypad to edit the name of the
bookmark or the URL.
4.
Tap OK.
Deleting Bookmarks
1.
From the Bookmarks page, touch and hold the bookmark
you want to delete.
2.
Tap Delete bookmark.
3.
At the confirmation window, tap OK.
Emptying the Cookies
A cookie is a small file placed on your phone by a website during
navigation. In addition to containing some site-specific
information, a cookie can also contain some personal information
(such as a username and password) which might pose a security
risk if not properly managed. You can clear these cookies from
your phone at any time.
1.
From the Home webpage, press
and then tap
More ➔ Settings ➔ Clear all cookie data.
2.
Tap OK to delete the cookies or tap Cancel to exit.
Connections
162
Using Web History
Browser Settings
The History list displays a list of the most recently viewed
websites. These entries can be used to return to previously
unmarked web pages.
1.
From the Home webpage, tap
➔ History tab.
A list of the most recently viewed websites displays.
2.
Tap an entry to display the webpage.
– or –
Press
and then tap Clear history to delete the current
History list.
Using Most Visited
The Most visited list provides you with a list of the most visited
and bookmarked websites. These entries are used to return to
previously unmarked web pages.
1.
From the Home webpage, tap
➔ Most visited tab.
A list of your most frequently visited webpages displays.
The most frequently visited web pages display at the top of
the list.
2.
163
Tap any entry to display the selected webpage.
To make configure browser settings:
1.
From the Home screen, tap
(Applications) ➔
(Web).
and then tap More ➔ Settings.
2.
Press
3.
Choose from the following on-screen options:
• Default zoom: Adjusts the zoom feature. Set to Far, Medium, or
Close.
• Open pages in overview: Displays an overview of recently viewed
web pages.
• Text encoding: Adjusts the current text encoding.
• Block pop-up windows: Prevents popup advertisement or
windows from appearing on-screen. Remove the checkmark to
disable this function.
• Load images: Allows web page images to load along with the other
text components of a loaded website.
• Auto-fit pages: Allows web pages to be resized to fit as much of
the screen as possible.
• Landscape view only: Displays the browser in only the horizontal
position.
• Enable JavaScript: Enables javascript for the current Web page.
Without this feature, some pages may not display properly. Remove
the checkmark to disable this function.
• Enable plug-ins: Allows the download of plug-ins such as Adobe
Flash.
• Open in background: New pages are launched in a separate page
and displayed behind the current one. Remove the checkmark to
disable this function.
• Set home page: Sets the current home page for the Web browser.
• Default storage: Sets the default storage to Phone or
Memory card.
• Clear cache: Deletes all currently cached data. Tap OK to complete
the process.
• Clear history: Clears the browser navigation history. Tap OK to
complete the process.
• Accept cookies: Allows sites, that require cookies, to save and
read cookies from your device.
• Clear all cookie data: Deletes all current browser cookie files.
• Remember form data: Allows the device to store data from any
previously filled out forms. Remove the checkmark to disable this
function.
• Clear form data: Deletes any stored data from previously filled out
forms. Tap OK to complete the process.
• Enable location: Allows websites to request access to your
location.
• Clear location access: Clears location access for all websites. Tap
OK to complete the process.
• Remember passwords: Stores usernames and passwords for
visited sites. Remove the checkmark to disable this function.
• Clear passwords: Deletes any previously stored usernames or
passwords. Tap OK to complete the process.
• Show security warnings: Notifies you if there is a security issue
with the current website. Remove the checkmark to disable this
function.
• Select search engine: Allows you to choose a default search
engine for your phone. Choose from: Google, Yahoo!, or Bing.
• Website settings: View advanced settings for individual websites.
• Reset to default: Clears all browser data and resets all settings to
default.
Bluetooth
About Bluetooth
Bluetooth is a short-range communications technology that
allows you to connect wirelessly to a number of Bluetooth
devices, such as headsets and hands-free car kits, and
Bluetooth-enabled handhelds, computers, printers, and wireless
devices. The Bluetooth communication range is usually up to
approximately 30 feet.
Connections
164
Turning Bluetooth On and Off
Bluetooth Settings
To turn Bluetooth on:
1.
Press
➔
(Settings) ➔
and then tap
Wireless and network ➔ Bluetooth settings.
2.
Tap the Bluetooth field to activate the feature (checkmark
indicates active). When active,
displays in the
Status area.
To access the Bluetooth Settings menu:
To turn Bluetooth off:
1.
Press
➔
The Bluetooth settings menu allows you to set up many of the
characteristics of your device’s Bluetooth service, including:
• Entering or changing the name your device uses for Bluetooth
communication and description
• Setting your device’s visibility (or “discoverability”) for other Bluetooth
devices
• Displaying your device’s Bluetooth address
and then tap
(Settings) ➔
1.
Tap the Bluetooth field to deactivate the feature.
2.
Displays when Bluetooth is active.
Displays when Bluetooth is connected (paired) and
communicating.
165
and then tap
(Settings) ➔
Verify Bluetooth is active. Indicated by a green check mark
in the Bluetooth field.
Bluetooth Status Indicators
The following icons show your Bluetooth connection status
at a glance:
➔
Wireless and network ➔ Bluetooth settings.
Wireless and network ➔ Bluetooth settings.
2.
Press
3.
Tap the Device name, Visible, Visible time-out, and Scan
devices fields to set the options.
To change your Bluetooth name:
1.
Verify Bluetooth is active.
2.
From the Bluetooth settings page, tap Device name.
3.
Enter a new name.
4.
Tap OK to complete the rename process.
To set visibility:
1.
Verify your Bluetooth is active.
2.
From the Bluetooth settings page, tap Visible.
Making your device visible allows other devices to pair and
communicate.
Note: Pairing between two Bluetooth devices is a one-time process. Once
pairing is established the devices continue to recognize their
partnership and exchange information without entering a passcode.
To pair your device with another Bluetooth device:
1.
Verify Bluetooth is active.
2.
From the Bluetooth settings page, tap Visible.
Note: From within the Visible timeout field, you can select a timeout valued
from: 2 Minutes, 5 Minutes, 1 Hour, or Never. This value appears as a
countdown within this field.
To scan for Bluetooth devices:
Your device must be visible to successfully pair with an
external device.
3.
Tap Scan devices. Your device displays a list of discovered
1.
Verify Bluetooth is active.
2.
From the Bluetooth settings page, tap Scan devices to
4.
Tap a device from the list to initiate pairing.
search for visible external Bluetooth-compatible devices
5.
Enter the passkey or PIN code, if needed, and tap OK.
6.
The external device must accept the connection and enter
such as headsets, devices, printers, and computers.
Pairing Bluetooth Devices
The Bluetooth pairing process allows you to establish trusted
connections between your device and another Bluetooth device.
When you pair devices, they share a passkey, allowing for fast,
secure connections while bypassing the discovery and
authentication process.
in-range Bluetooth devices.
your device’s PIN code.
Once successfully paired to an external device,
displays in the Status area.
Note: Due to different specifications and features of other Bluetoothcompatible devices, display and operations may be different, and
functions such as transfer or exchange may not be possible with all
Bluetooth-compatible devices.
Connections
166
Disconnecting a Paired Bluetooth Device
2.
1.
Verify your Bluetooth is active.
2.
From the Bluetooth settings page, touch the previously
paired device (from the bottom of the page).
3.
Tap OK to confirm disconnection.
From the Bluetooth settings page, touch and hold the
name of the previously paired device (from the bottom of
Disconnecting a paired device breaks the connection between
the device and your phone, but retains the knowledge of the
pairing. At a later point when you wish to reconnect the device,
there is no need to setup the connection information again.
the page). This opens the connected device’s menu
options.
3.
Tap Unpair to delete the paired device.
Sending Contacts via Bluetooth
Depending on your paired devices’ settings and capabilities, you
may be able to send pictures, Contact information, or other items
using a Bluetooth connection.
– or –
From the Bluetooth settings page, touch and hold the
name of the previously paired device, and select
Note: Prior to using this feature, Bluetooth must first be enabled on both your
phone and the external device, and the recipient’s device must be
visible.
Disconnect.
Note: Disconnections are manually done but often occur automatically if the
paired device goes out of range of your phone or it is powered off.
Deleting a Paired Bluetooth Device
Deleting a device from your list removes its “connection record”
and upon reconnection would require that you re-enter all the
previous pairing information.
1.
167
Verify Bluetooth is active.
Only a Contact’s information can be sent via Bluetooth. No other file
type (video, image, or audio) can be sent using Bluetooth.
1.
Verify your Bluetooth is active and your phone is visible.
2.
From the Home screen, tap
3.
Touch and hold the entry from the list to display the on-
(Contacts).
screen context menu.
4.
Tap Send namecard via ➔ Bluetooth and select a paired
external Bluetooth device.
Note: The external Bluetooth device must be visible and communicating for
the pairing to be successful.
5.
A Bluetooth share notification displays in your notifications
list.
Enable Downloading for Web Applications
Important!: Before you can download a web application you must insert an
SD into the phone and enable the Unknown sources feature
(enables downloading). For more information, refer to “Installing
the microSD Memory Card” on page 9. Also, see “Mounting the
SD Card” on page 50.
1.
Press
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔
Applications.
2.
Tap the Unknown sources check box.
3.
Tap OK to allow install of non-Market applications.
Tap again to remove the checkmark and disable the
installation of non-market applications.
Warning!: Not all web applications are safe to download. In order to protect
your phone and data, use Android Market to install web
applications. For more information, refer to “Downloading a New
Google Application” on page 143.
PC Connections
You can connect your device to a PC using an optional PC data
cable using various USB connection modes. When you connect
the device to a PC, you can synchronize files with Windows
Media Player, and transfer data to and from your device directly.
Mass storage: allows you to use the onboard storage capacity of
the device to store and upload files. This option allows your
computer to detect the phone as a removable storage drive.
Connecting as a Mass Storage Device
You can connect your device to a PC as a removable disk and
access the file directory. If you insert a memory card in the
device, you can also access the files directory from the memory
card by using the device as a memory card reader.
Note: The file directory of the memory card displays as a removable disk,
separate from the internal memory.
1.
Insert a memory card into the device to transfer files from
or to the memory card.
Note: To use any downloaded market application that requires a USB
connection between your phone and your PC, you should first set the
USB setting to Mass storage.
Connections
168
2.
Press
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔
Applications ➔ USB settings ➔ Mass storage.
3.
Press
to return to Idle mode.
4.
Connect the multifunction jack on your device to a PC
using an optional PC data cable.
What is Kies Mini?
Samsung Kies Mini is a software that enables you to update your
device firmware by connecting to the PC.
To learn more about Samsung Kies Mini and Samsung applications:
1.
http://www.samsung.com/us/support/downloads
A pop-up window displays on the PC when connected.
5.
Open the folder to view files.
6.
Copy files from the PC to the memory card.
Using USB Debugging for Additional Connections
The Application menu allows you to connect the phone to a PC,
connect with Kies and synchronize files with Windows Media
Player.
• Samsung Kies: connects your phone to a PC and prepares it for a
direct firmware update.
• Media player: connects your phone to a PC in order to synchronize
files with Windows Media Player.
USB debugging must be enabled before being able to use these
features. For more information, refer to “Enabling USB
Debugging” on page 170.
Browse Samsung Support site and locate your phone:
2.
Navigate to the Software tab and download Kies Mini.
Important!: If you need any additional USB drivers, these can also be found
within the phone’s Download Center > Software tab.
Prior to using Kies for Phone Update
Before using Kies to upgrade your device, it is recommended that
you backup your personal data prior to use. For more
information, refer to “Copying Contact Information” on page 91.
To export a Contact list to your microSD card:
1.
From the Home screen, tap
2.
From the Contacts List, press
.
and then tap
Import/Export ➔ Export to SD card.
3.
Read the on-screen message and tap OK to choose all
current phone contact entries and transfer them.
169
Verify your images and videos are on your microSD card:
1.
From the Home screen, tap
5.
(Applications) ➔
(Gallery).
device firmware.
6.
2.
Verify the Gallery contains all of your pictures and videos.
3.
Remove the back cover and remove the internal microSD
card prior to initiating a Kies Mini update.
Press
➔
and then tap
Ensure that Windows Media Player is installed on your PC.
1.
Press
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔
Applications ➔ USB settings ➔ Media player.
(Settings) ➔
Applications ➔ Development.
2.
Refer to Samsung Kies Help for more information.
Synchronizing with Windows Media Player
Enabling USB Debugging
1.
Run Samsung Kies and follow the prompts to update your
2.
Press the Home key to return to Idle mode.
3.
Using an optional PC data cable, connect the multifunction
Tap the USB debugging field to verify the feature is active
jack on your device to a PC with Windows Media Player
before connecting your USB cable.
installed.
Connecting with Kies Mini
A pop-up window displays on the PC when connected.
1.
Install Samsung Kies Mini software on your PC.
2.
Press
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔
Applications ➔ USB settings ➔ Samsung Kies.
3.
Verify USB debugging is active.
4.
Using an optional PC data cable, connect the multifunction
4.
Open Windows Media Player to synchronize music files.
5.
Edit or enter your device’s name in the pop-up window.
6.
Select and drag the music files you want to the sync list
and begin synchronizing.
jack on your device to a PC.
Connections
170
Wi-Fi
Connecting to a Wi-Fi Network
About Wi-Fi
1.
Wi-Fi (short for "wireless fidelity") is a term used for certain
types of Wireless Local Area Networks (WLAN). Wi-Fi
communication requires access to an existing and accessible
Wireless Access Point (WAP). These WAPs can either be Open
(unsecured) as within most Hot Spots, or Secured (requiring
knowledge of the Router name and password).
Note: After you complete a connection to an active Wi-Fi network, the Wi-Fi
Calling feature will automatically be enabled. For more information,
refer to “Wi-Fi Calling” on page 59.
By default, your device’s Wi-Fi feature is turned off (deactivated).
Activating Wi-Fi allows your device to discover and connect to
compatible in-range WAPs (Wireless Access Points).
1.
Press
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔
Wireless and network ➔ Wi-Fi settings.
2.
Tap Wi-Fi to activate the feature. A checkmark indicates
that Wi-Fi is active. The device scans for available in-range
wireless networks and displays them under Wi-Fi networks
on the same screen.
171
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔
Wireless and network ➔ Wi-Fi settings.
The network names and security settings (Open network or
Secured with WEP) of detected Wi-Fi networks display in
the Wi-Fi networks section.
2.
Tap the network you wish to connect to.
Note: When you select an open network you are automatically connected.
3.
Activating Wi-Fi
Press
Enter a wireless password (if necessary).
Manually Add a New Network Connection
1.
2.
Tap Add Wi-Fi network.
1.
Press
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔
Wireless and network ➔ Wi-Fi settings.
Enter the Network SSID (the name of your Wireless Access
Point).
3.
Deactivating Wi-Fi
2.
Tap the Wi-Fi field to deactivate the feature. The
checkmark grays.
Tap the Security field and select a security option. This
must match the current security setting on your target
WAP.
4.
Enter your WAP’s password if the WAP is secure.
5.
Tap Save to store the new information and connect to the
Note: Use of wireless data connections such as Wi-Fi and Bluetooth can
reduce battery life and use times.
Manually Scan for a Wi-Fi Network
1.
target WAP.
Note: No prompt to enter the WAP key displays if this is the second time to
connect to a previously accessed or secured wireless network. The
WAP key is required when the device is reset using factory default
settings.
Press
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔
Wireless and network ➔ Wi-Fi settings.
2.
Press
and then tap Scanning.
Wi-Fi Status Indicators
The following icons indicate the Wi-Fi connection status:
Displays when Wi-Fi is connected, active, and
communicating with a Wireless Access Point (WAP).
Displays when Wi-Fi is active and there is an available
open wireless network.
Connections
172
Wi-Fi Advanced Settings
2.
The Wi-Fi settings - Advanced menu allows you to set up many of
the device’s Wi-Fi services, including:
• Setting the Wi-Fi sleep policy
• Viewing the device’s MAC Address
• Configuring use of either a DHCP or Static IP
phone.
3.
Press
➔
and then tap
4.
Press
Tap USB tethering from the Tethering menu. This places a
feature. A Tethering or Hotspot active notification briefly
(Settings) ➔
appears on the screen.
Look for the Tethering active icon
and then tap Advanced.
To disconnect tethering:
This option allows you to share your phone’s mobile data
connection via a direct USB connection between your phone and
computer. A wireless version of this same functionality would be
the Mobile AP feature.
1.
Press
➔
and then tap
Note: You can not mount your phone’s microSD card to your computer while
using the USB tethering feature. If additional software or USB drivers
are required, navigate to: http://www.samsung.com/us/support/
downloads.
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔
Wireless and network ➔ Tethering and portable hotspot.
173
(Settings) ➔
Wireless and network ➔ Tethering and portable hotspot.
2.
Tap USB tethering from the Tethering menu to remove the
check mark and deactivate the feature.
Press
in the Status bar
area of the screen.
Tethering
1.
to exit the
green check mark next to the entry and activates the
Wireless and network ➔ Wi-Fi settings.
2.
When prompted for a USB mode, press
menu.
To access the Wi-Fi Advanced Settings menu:
1.
Plug in the USB cable between your computer and your
3.
Remove the USB cable from the phone.
Mobile AP
This feature allows you to turn your phone into a Wi-Fi hotspot.
The feature works best when used in conjunction with HSPA+
(4G) data services (although 3G service can also be used).
Important!: The Mobile AP service can not be active at the same time as
Wi-Fi. Please close your Wi-Fi connection prior to launching the
Mobile AP service.
Note: Using your 4G service and Mobile AP Hotspot drains your phone’s
battery at a much faster rate than when using any other feature
combination.
The best way to keep using the phone as a hotspot is to have it
connected to a power supply.
To connect to the Hotspot:
1.
Enable Wi-Fi (wireless) functionality on your target device
(laptop, media device, etc.).
To activate the Mobile AP service:
1.
Press
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔
Wireless and network ➔ Tethering and portable hotspot.
2.
Tap Mobile AP settings ➔ Mobile AP, this places a
checkmark in the adjacent field to activate the service.
3.
Tap OK to continue with the activation.
4.
Tap Configure mobile AP.
5.
Create a new Network SSID name and then write it down.
6.
Confirm the Mobile AP service icon
2.
Scan for Wi-Fi networks from the device and select your
phone hotspot from the network list.
• Search for the name you gave your device within the Network SSID
field.
• You can later change the name by tapping Configure mobile AP
➔ Network SSID and changing the entry.
3. Select this Hotspot and follow your on-screen instructions
to complete the connection.
appears at the
4.
Launch your Web browser to confirm you have an Internet
connection.
top of the screen.
Note: By default, the connection is open and not secured. It is recommended
that you access the Mobile AP settings and create a secure connection
by using a password for communication.
Connections
174
To secure the Mobile AP service:
The two most common methods for securing your connection to
the Hotspot are to a security method (WPA2 PSK) and to Hide
your phone’s SSID name.
1.
Press
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔
Wireless and network ➔ Tethering and portable hotspot ➔
Mobile AP settings ➔ Configure mobile AP.
2.
Tap the Security field and select WPA2 PSK.
3.
With security enabled, enter a new password into the
Password field.
Important!: The more complex the password, the harder it will be for
intruders to break your security. It is recommended that you not
use names, birthdays, or
4.
Tap the Hide my device field to keep your phone from
transmitting its Network SSID name.
5.
175
Tap Save to store the new settings.
Section 11: Time Management
This section describes how you can manage time using timerelated applications such as the Calendar, Alarm Clock, Analog or
Digital clock, and the World clock.
Calendar
With the Calendar feature, you can consult the calendar by day,
week, or month, create events, and set an alarm to act as a
reminder.
1.
From the Home screen, tap
(Applications) ➔
(Calendar). The Calendar displays four tabs:
•
•
•
•
Month: displays the Month view.
Week: displays the Week view.
Day: displays the Day view.
List: allows you to search for events for the selected Month, Week,
or Day. Or you can look for events for a future date.
2. Press
and select one of the following options:
•
•
•
•
Search: allows you to search within your current events.
Create: creates a new Event.
Go to: displays a specific date.
Today: displays the date highlighted with a Blue box highlighting
the date.
• Delete: allows you to delete All events, All events before today, or
an individual event.
• Settings: displays a list of configurable settings.
Creating a Calendar Event
1.
From the Home screen, tap
(Applications) ➔
(Calendar).
2.
From the Month tab, press
➔ Create.
Calendar Settings
Using the Calendar settings you can select the day with which
you want the calendar to begin. You also select how you want to
view the calendar, by Month, Week, or Day or determine how to
manage events, notifications, sounds, and defaults reminders.
(Applications) ➔
1.
From the Home screen, tap
2.
Press
.
3.
Tap Calendars and select the calendar categories you want
➔ Settings.
to display or tap All calendars. A check mark indicates
selection.
Time Management
176
4.
Tap Calendar sync and select the type of general
synchronization settings you want. A check mark indicates
selection.
5.
Tap Default view and select a view: Month, Week, Day, or
List.
6.
Tap Day view and select a type: Time grid, or Event list.
7.
Tap First day of week and select either Sunday or Monday.
8.
Tap Hide declined events to activate this option. A check
Alarm and Clocks
This feature allows you to create an alarm to ring at a specified
time, track time in other parts of the world, use a stopwatch, or
set a timer.
䊳
Setting an Alarm
Tap
3.
Use the plus or minus symbols to enter the hour, and
was last selected).
10. Tap Set alerts & notifications to adjust the event notification
4.
Tap the Alarm repeat field and touch the number of times
you want this alarm to repeat. Selections are: One-time
Off.
event, Daily, Every weekday(Mon-Fri), or Weekly. If you
11. Tap Vibrate to activate this notification option. Selections
selected Weekly, a button row displays. Tap each day of
are: Always, Only in Silent mode, or Never.
the week in which you want this alarm to repeat, then tap
12. Tap Select ringtone to assign a ringtone to a calendar event
177
(Create alarm).
minutes, then tap AM or PM (toggles depending on which
within the Select time zone field.
notification.
(Applications) ➔
2.
Tap Lock time zone (to lock event time based on your
method. Choose from: Alert, Status bar notification, and
From the Home screen, tap
(Alarm & Clocks).
mark indicates selection.
current user-selected time zone). Select a time zone from
(Applications) ➔
(Alarm & Clocks).
1.
9.
From the Home screen, tap
Save.
5.
Tap the Name field and enter a name for this Alarm.
6.
7.
Tap the radio button to activate a tone for one of the
1.
Locate a desired city from the World Clock list.
Tap the Alarm type field and select one of the following:
2.
Touch and hold a city and select DST settings.
3.
Select a DST setting (Automatic, Off, 1 hour or 2 hours).
Melody, Vibration, Vibration and melody, or Voice.
8.
Tap the Alarm tone field and select one of the following:
Stopwatch
Sounds, or Go to My files. Locate a sound to use as an
This feature allows you to use a stopwatch to time multiple laps.
alarm ringtone then tap OK to activate the ringtone.
9.
1.
Slide the slider bar left or right in the Alarm volume field to
decrease or increase the alarm volume. A sample of the
volume level plays.
World Clock
This feature allows you to find out what time it is another part of
world.
1.
To assign DST settings:
following alarm types: Snooze or Smart alarm.
From the Home screen, tap
2.
Tap Start to start the stopwatch counter.
3.
Tap Lap to begin the lap time counter.
4.
Tap Stop to stop the counter.
5.
Tap Restart to restart the lap counter. You can have
multiple lap times.
6.
2.
Tap the World Clock tab.
3.
Tap
(Applications) ➔
(Alarm & Clocks) ➔ Stop watch tab.
(Applications) ➔
.
From the Home screen, tap
Tap Reset to reset the counter.
(Add city) then scroll and select the desired city,
or tap in the search field to locate a city.
Time Management
178
Setting a Timer
1.
From the Home screen, tap
(Applications) ➔
(Alarm & Clocks) ➔ Timer tab.
2.
Tap the hr, min, or sec field and use the on-screen keypad
to enter the hour, minute, or seconds.
3.
4.
Tap Start to start the timer.
Tap Stop to stop the timer or Reset to reset the timer and
start over.
5.
179
Tap Restart to resume the timer counter.
Section 12: Changing Your Settings
This section explains the sound and phone settings for your phone.
It includes such settings as: display, security, memory, and any
extra settings associated with your phone.
Wireless and Networks
Activating Wi-Fi
1.
and then tap
(Settings) ➔
Wireless and network.
2.
Tap Wi-Fi. A check mark displayed indicates Wi-Fi is
Once set up for Wi-Fi connectivity, your phone automatically uses
Wi-Fi, when available, for all your mobile phone services.
1.
➔
(Settings) ➔
Wi-Fi settings
Important!: When your phone is in Airplane Mode, it cannot send or receive
any calls or access online information or applications.
Press
and then tap
active.
Flight mode allows you to use many of your phone’s features,
such as Camera, Games, and more, when you are in an airplane
or in any other area where making or receiving calls or data is
prohibited.
1.
➔
Wireless and network ➔ Wi-Fi settings.
2.
Using Flight mode
Press
Tap Flight mode. A check mark displayed next to the
Press
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔
Wireless and network ➔ Wi-Fi settings.
2.
Configure the settings as desired.
The available connection types displayed with a security type
displayed next to them.
feature indicates Flight mode is active.
Changing Your Settings
180
Network Notification
By default, when Wi-Fi is on, you receive notifications in the
Status bar anytime your phone detects an available Wi-Fi
network. You can deactivate this feature if you do not want to
receive notifications.
1.
Press
➔
and then tap
Tap Network notification. A check mark displayed next to
the feature indicates Network notification is active.
3.
1.
Tap Network notification again to remove the check mark
The WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) button is a standard for easy
and secure wireless network set up and connections. To use
WPS, the connecting device must support WPS and be
compatible with Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) security. WPS can
automatically set up a random network name and WPA wireless
security for wireless Wi-Fi phones, routers, access points,
computers, adapters, and other electronic devices.
181
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔
2.
Tap WPS button connection.
3.
Press the WPS button on your Wi-Fi access point within 2
minutes.
Manually Adding a Wi-Fi Network
1.
Press
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔
Wireless and network ➔ Wi-Fi settings.
and deactivate this feature.
WPS Button Connection
Press
Wireless and network ➔ Wi-Fi settings.
(Settings) ➔
Wireless and network ➔ Wi-Fi settings.
2.
WPS allows you to push buttons instead of entering a network
name and wireless security PIN.
2.
Tap Wi-Fi to turn it on.
3.
Tap Add Wi-Fi network.
4.
Enter the SSID (Service Set Identifier) and Security settings
then tap Save.
Note: An SSID is a unique key which identifies a wireless LAN. Its purpose is
to stop other wireless equipment from accessing your LAN — whether
accidentally or intentionally. To communicate, wireless devices must
be configured with the same SSID.
Bluetooth settings
Activating Visibility
In this menu you can activate Bluetooth, view or assign a device
name, activate your phone so other Bluetooth devices can
discover it, or scan for other, available Bluetooth devices with
which to pair.
䊳
Press
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔
The phone is now activated for discovery for 119 seconds
so you can pair with another device. After 119 seconds the
Scanning for Devices
1.
Note: Bluetooth must be enabled prior to use.
Press
➔
Press
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔
Wireless and network ➔ Bluetooth settings ➔
Activating the Device Name
2.
(Settings) ➔
This option allows you to scan for active Bluetooth devices so you
can pair with them.
Bluetooth to turn it on.
Activate Bluetooth.
and then tap
phone becomes undiscoverable again.
Wireless and network ➔ Bluetooth settings and tap
1.
➔
Wireless and network ➔ Bluetooth settings ➔ Visible.
Activating Bluetooth
䊳
Press
Scan devices.
Your phone begins scanning and lists any discovered
and then tap
(Settings) ➔
Wireless and network ➔ Bluetooth settings ➔ Device name.
devices in the Bluetooth devices section.
2.
Tap a device name to pair with the device.
The assigned device name displays.
3.
Press
to erase the current device name and enter a
Important!: Some Bluetooth devices are secured and require a PIN number to
confirm and pair with them.
new name for this device using the keyboard.
4.
Tap OK to confirm your setting.
3.
Enter a PIN to pair with the device, if one is required, and
tap OK.
Changing Your Settings
182
Tethering
To disconnect tethering:
This option allows you to share your phone’s mobile data
connection via a direct USB connection between your phone and
computer. A wireless version of this same functionality would be
the Mobile AP feature.
Note: You can not mount your phone’s microSD card to your computer while
using the USB tethering feature. If additional software or USB drivers
are required, navigate to: http://www.samsung.com/us/support/
downloads.
1.
Press
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔
1.
Press
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔
Wireless and network ➔ Tethering and portable hotspot.
2.
Tap USB tethering from the Tethering menu to remove the
check mark and deactivate the feature.
3.
Remove the USB cable from the phone.
VPN settings
The VPN settings menu allows you to set up and manage Virtual
Private Networks (VPNs).
Wireless and network ➔ Tethering and portable hotspot.
2.
Plug in the USB cable between your computer and your
Adding a VPN
phone.
3.
When prompted for a USB mode, press
to exit the
menu.
4.
Important!: Before you can use a VPN you must establish and configure one.
Tap USB tethering from the Tethering menu. This places a
green check mark next to the entry and activates the
Before you add a VPN you must determine which VPN protocol to
use: PPTP (Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol), L2TP (Layer 2
Tunneling Protocol), L2TP/IPSec PSK (Pre-shared key based
L2TP/IPSec), or L2TP/IPSec CRT (Certificate based L2TP/IPSec).
1.
feature. A Tethering or Hotspot active notification briefly
appears on the screen.
Look for the Tethering active icon
area of the screen.
183
in the Status bar
Press
➔
and then tap
Wireless and network ➔ VPN settings.
2.
Tap Add VPN.
(Settings) ➔
To establish a PPTP (Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol):
To establish a L2TP/IPSec CRT (Certificate based L2TP/IPSec):
1.
Establish a VPN name (a name for this connection).
1.
Establish a VPN name (a name for this connection).
2.
Set the VPN server.
2.
Set the VPN server.
3.
Enable encryption (if desired).
3.
Enable L2TP secret.
4.
Set the DNS search domains.
4.
Set L2TP secret.
To establish a L2TP (Layer 2 Tunneling Protocol):
1.
Establish a VPN name (a name for this connection).
2.
Set the VPN server.
3.
Enable L2TP secret.
4.
Set L2TP secret.
5.
Set the DNS search domains.
To establish a L2TP/IPSec PSK (Pre-shared key based L2TP/IPSec):
1.
Establish a VPN name (a name for this connection).
2.
Set the VPN server.
3.
Set IPSEc pre-shared key.
4.
Enable L2TP secret.
5.
Set L2TP secret.
6.
Set the DNS search domains.
5.
Set user certificate. Note: A user certificate must be
installed to use this setting.
6.
Set CA certificate. Note: A CA certificate must be installed
to use this setting.
7.
Set the DNS search domains.
Mobile networks
Before you use applications such as Google Maps and find your
location or search for places of interest, you must enable the
Mobile networks options.
䊳
Press
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔
Wireless and network ➔ Mobile networks.
Changing Your Settings
184
Access Point Names
The following options display:
Use packet data
To use Wi-Fi you need access to a wireless access point (hotspot):
Allows you to activate data usage on your phone.
䊳
Press
➔
and then tap
䊳
(Settings) ➔
(Settings) ➔
Names. A list of the Access point names display. The active
Use packet data.
access point displays a bright green, filled circle to the
right of the name.
Press
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔
Network mode
You can configure your phone to either manually detect and use
either a 2G (GSM) or 3G (WCDMA) data network connection.
䊳
Press
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔
Wireless and network ➔ Mobile networks.
Wireless and network ➔ Mobile networks ➔ Network
Tap Data roaming to connect to data services while
mode.
roaming outside your network.
– or –
Tap Data roaming again to remove the green checkmark
and deactivate the feature.
185
and then tap
Wireless and network ➔ Mobile networks ➔
Data roaming allows you to connect to your service provider’s
partner networks and access data services when you are out of
your service providers area of coverage.
2.
➔
Wireless and network ➔ Mobile networks ➔ Access Point
Data Roaming
1.
Press
Using the 4G Network
Note: Connecting to 2G networks slows the data transfer speed and time.
To confirm you are always using the fastest possible connection,
the phone has an automatic detection method where it finds both
the fastest and most stable connection/communication method.
This phone is capable of using either 4G/3G services for this
connection.
1.
Press
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔
Using the 3G Network
If you are using applications that require the 3G network speed,
follow these instructions to connect to the 3G network.
1.
to this option to indicate that it is active. This is the default
mode for this phone.
Using the 2G (EDGE) Network
If you are not using applications that require the 3G network
speed (any application that accesses the network or uses a
browser), using the 2G network saves battery life.
1.
Press
➔
and then tap
mode.
2.
Tap GSM only. A check mark displays next to this option to
indicate that it is active.
2.
(Settings) ➔
Tap WCDMA only. A check mark displays next to this option
to indicate that it is active.
Network Operators
Using this feature you can view the current network connection.
You can also scan and select a network operator manually, or set
the network selection to Automatic.
1.
Press
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔
Wireless and network ➔ Mobile networks.
(Settings) ➔
Wireless and network ➔ Mobile networks ➔ Network
and then tap
mode.
mode.
Tap GSM/WCDMA (auto mode). A check mark displays next
➔
Wireless and network ➔ Mobile networks ➔ Network
Wireless and network ➔ Mobile networks ➔ Network
2.
Press
2.
Tap Network operators. The current network connection
displays at the bottom of the list.
Important!: You must deactivate data service prior to searching for an
available network.
Changing Your Settings
186
3.
4.
Tap Search now to manually search for a network.
Tap Select automatically to automatically select a network
Call Settings
To access the Call settings menu:
䊳
connection.
Press
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔
Call settings.
Note: Connecting to 2G networks slows the data transfer speed and time.
– or –
Default Setup Options
From the Home screen, tap
Your phone default is set to Automatic (to automatically search
for an available network. You can set this option to Manual to
select a network each time you connect.
1.
Press
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔
Wireless and network ➔ Mobile networks ➔ Network
Configuring General Call Settings
Configure the general call settings using this option.
1.
Tap Default setup.
3.
Tap Manual to locate and connect to a network manually.
– or –
Tap Automatic to allow the device to automatically select a
network.
187
From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔ Call
settings ➔ All calls.
operators.
2.
➔ Settings ➔
Call settings.
2.
Tap one of the following options:
• Show my number: allows you to select how your ID is handled
when an outgoing call is initiated.
• Auto reject: sets the phone to automatically reject incoming calls or
messages.
• Answering call: selects how your phone answers incoming calls.
Enable Answering mode, then select one of the following methods
for answering the phone:
– Answering mode activates or deactivates the answering mode
function.
– Answering key allows you to press a key to answer the phone.
– Automatic answering automatically answers after a period of time.
Selections are: Off, after 1 second, after 2 seconds, after 3 seconds,
after 4 seconds, or after 5 seconds.
• Prefix dialing: when activated, this feature automatically prepends
a string of numbers (such as an area code) to any dialed number.
This feature is useful for international dialing, or dialing within an
area code where all the calls you make for a period of time use one
prefix. For more information, refer to “Prefix Dialing” on
page 54.
• Reject call with message: allows you to send a message
immediately after rejecting a call.
• Call status tones: sets a tone to play for the following status tones:
Call connect tone, Minute minder, or Call end tone. Touch each type
of status tone you want to play.
• Outgoing call vibration: allows your phone to vibrate when the
called party answers.
• Alerts on call: activates an alert tone for new messages being
received during an active call.
Configuring Voice Calls
1.
Press
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔
Call settings ➔ Voice call.
2.
Tap one of the following options:
• Call forwarding: configures call forwarding options:
– Always forward: incoming calls are re-routed to a secondary number
that you specify.
– Forward when busy: forwards all your calls to voicemail when your
phone is busy.
– Forward when unanswered: automatically forwards to your
voicemail number when the phone is not answered, and otherwise
allows you to enter a voicemail number.
– Forward when unreachable: automatically forwards to your
voicemail number when the phone is not in service, or is turned off.
• Call barring: allows specified numbers to be barred from this
phone.
• Call waiting: enables call waiting functionality. When deactivated,
all incoming calls are directed to your voicemail if you are already on
an active call.
• Auto redial: automatically redial the dialed number if it is unable to
connect or the call is cut off.
• Noise suppression: to enable/disable noise suppression
technology.
Fixed Dialing Numbers
Fixed Dial Number (FDN), allows you to restrict outgoing calls to a
limited set of phone numbers.
Enabling FDN
1.
Press
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔
Call settings ➔ Fixed Dialing Numbers.
2.
Tap Enable FDN.
3.
At the prompt, enter your PIN2 code and tap OK.
Changing Your Settings
188
Important!: Not all SIM cards use a PIN2 code. If your SIM card does not, this
menu does not display.
The PIN2 code is provided by your carrier. Entering an incorrect
PIN2 code could cause the phone to lock. Contact customer
service for assistance.
Managing the FDN List
When this feature is enabled, you can make calls only to phone
numbers stored in the FDN list on the SIM card.
1.
Press
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔
Call settings ➔ Fixed Dialing Numbers.
Changing the PIN2 Code
1.
Press
➔
2.
and then tap
(Settings) ➔
Call settings ➔ Fixed Dialing Numbers.
2.
Tap Change PIN2.
3.
At the prompt, enter your old PIN2 code.
4.
At the prompt, enter a new PIN2 code.
5.
Confirm your PIN2 code.
3.
At the prompt, enter your PIN2 code and tap OK.
FDN is enabled.
4.
Tap FDN list then press
and then tap Add contact or
edit the contacts that were stored.
Important!: Not all SIM cards use a PIN2 code. If your SIM card does not, this
menu does not display.
The PIN2 code is provided by your carrier. Entering an incorrect
PIN2 code could cause the phone to lock. Contact customer
service for assistance.
Important!: Not all SIM cards use a PIN2 code. If your SIM card does not, this
menu does not display.
The PIN2 code is provided by your carrier. Entering an incorrect
PIN2 code could cause the phone to lock. Contact customer
service for assistance.
Tap Enable FDN.
Voicemail
You can view your voicemail number from this menu.
1.
Press
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔
Call settings ➔ Voicemail.
2.
189
Tap Voicemail service and select My carrier.
3.
Tap Voicemail to now view your number within the
Voicemail number field.
This menu is used to activate or deactivate Hearing Aid
Compatibility for this device.
TTY Mode
A TTY (also known as a TDD or Text Telephone) is a
telecommunications device that allows people who are deaf,
hard of hearing, or who have speech or language disabilities, to
communicate by telephone.
Your phone is compatible with select TTY devices. Please check
with the manufacturer of your TTY device to ensure that it is
compatible with digital cell phones.
Your phone and TTY device will connect via a special cable that
plugs into your phone’s headset jack. If this cable was not
provided with your TTY device, contact your TTY device
manufacturer to purchase the connector cable.
1.
Press
➔
and then tap
Tap On to activate the feature, or Off to deactivate the
feature. Off is the default setting.
1.
Press
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔
Call settings ➔ HAC mode.
2.
Tap On to activate the feature, or Off to deactivate the
feature. Off is the default setting.
Drive Smart
The DriveSmart application can be used to reduce distractions
from your phone by silencing notifications, routing calls to
voicemail and customizing auto responses to both callers and
text message respondents notifying them that your driving.
䊳
Press
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔
DriveSmart.
(Settings) ➔
Call settings ➔ TTY mode.
2.
HAC Mode
For more information, refer to “DriveSmart” on page 137.
Sound Settings
From this menu you can control the sounds on the phone as well
as configure the display settings.
䊳
Press
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔ Sound.
The following options display:
Changing Your Settings
190
Silent mode
Adjusting the Volume Settings
Silent mode is convenient when you wish to stop the phone from
making noise, in a theater for example. In Silent Mode the
speaker is muted and the phone only vibrates to notify you of
incoming calls, or other functions that normally have a defined
tone or sound as an alert.
➔
1.
Press
2.
Tap Silent mode.
and then tap
(Settings) ➔ Sound.
1.
Press
➔
and then tap
From the Home screen, press and hold the Lock key until
Phone options displays.
2.
Touch and drag the on-screen slider to assign the volume
• Incoming call volume, Media volume, System volume, or
Notification volume.
3. Tap OK to assign the volume levels.
Setup the Voice Call Ringtone
Tap Silent mode to activate or deactivate this mode (the
1.
Press
current mode displays).
2.
Tap Phone ringtone.
3.
Tap a ringtone from the available list. The ringtone briefly
Setup Phone Vibration
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔ Sound
1.
Press
2.
Tap Vibrate and select a vibration mode. Choose from:
Always, Never, Only in silent mode, or Only when not in silent
mode.
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔ Sound.
plays when selected.
4.
Tap OK to assign a ringer.
Setting a Notification Ringtone
1.
Press
➔
and then tap
➔ Notification ringtone.
2.
191
(Settings) ➔ Sound
➔ Volume.
settings for any of the following volume levels.
– or –
3.
The Volume menu now provides access to various volume
settings within one on-screen popup menu.
Tap one of the ringtones and tap OK.
(Settings) ➔ Sound
Audible Tone Settings
2.
The Audible touch tones and Audible selection options are used
when you use the dialing pad or making a screen selection. Each
time you press a key or make a selection the selected tone
sounds.
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔ Sound.
1.
Press
2.
Tap Audible touch tones or Audible selection. A check mark
displayed next to these features indicates active status.
Screen Lock Sounds
The screen lock sounds option is used to activate/deactivate
sounds when locking and unlocking the screen.
1.
2.
Press
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔ Sound.
Tap Screen lock sounds. A check mark displayed next to
these features indicates active status.
Haptic Feedback and Vibration Intensity
Instead of sounding a tone, the Haptic feedback option vibrates
when you press soft keys on certain screens. You can also set the
intensity of the vibration using the Vibration intensity setting.
1.
Press
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔ Sound.
Tap Haptic feedback. A check mark displayed next to the
feature indicates Haptic feedback
is active.
3.
Tap Vibration intensity then touch and drag the slider to
adjust the vibration intensity, then touch OK.
Display Settings
In this menu, you can change various settings for the display
such as the font, orientation, pop-up notifications, puzzle lock
feature, animation, brightness, screen timeout, power saving
mode, and tv out settings.
䊳
Press
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔
Display. The following options display:
• Wallpapers: assigns either the Home screen or Lock screen
wallpaper images.
• Font style: sets the fonts used on the LCD display. Selections are:
Default font, Choco cooky, Cool jazz, and Rosemary. Tap Get fonts
online to download additional fonts.
• Brightness: configures the LCD Brightness levels. Tap Automatic
brightness to allow the phone to self-adjust and tap OK.
• Auto-rotate screen: when enabled, the phone automatically
switches from portrait to landscape orientation and vice versa.
When this setting is disabled, the phone displays in portrait mode
only.
Changing Your Settings
192
• Puzzle lock: when selected puzzle pieces display on the lock
screen for messages and missed calls. Slide the puzzle piece into
the matching slot to view the message or missed call information.
• Animation: determines whether some or all of the window
elements animate. Selections are: No animations, Some
animations, or All animations.
• Screen timeout: adjusts the delay time before the screen
automatically turns off. Selections are: 15 seconds, 30 seconds,
1 minute, 2 minutes, and 10 minutes.
• Power saving mode: saves power because the phone analyzes the
displayed screen image and adjusts the LCD brightness.
• TV out: connects your phone to your television (using an optional
cable) and displays any image stored on the phone directly on your
television.
• Horizontal calibration: uses the accelerometer to calibrate the
phone when held in a horizontal position.
Power Saving Mode
This mode allows you to save power because the phone analyzes
the displayed screen image and adjusts the LCD brightness.
1.
Press
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔
Display.
2.
Touch Power Saving mode to activate the feature. A check
mark displayed next to the feature indicates Power Saving
mode is active.
193
Connecting your Phone to the TV
This feature allows you to connect your phone to your television
(using an optional cable) and view any imaged stored on the
phone and view it directly on your television.
Note: The TV system (NTSC) option is used if you are connecting to an older,
analog NTSC system.
To use the TV out feature:
1.
Press
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔ Display
➔ TV out.
2.
Tap one of the following options:
• TV out: to play all of the phone's video output through the TV-out
feature.
• TV system: to play the phone's video out through an analog TV
video system converter (NTSC/PAL).
Note: NTSC is usually used in America.
Horizontal Calibration
Enabling the GPS Satellites
Calibrate your phone by using the built-in accelerometer.
1.
Press
➔
and then tap
➔ Horizontal calibration.
2.
1.
2.
Place the phone on a level surface and tap Calibrate. The
phone adjusts the level of the accelerometer. During the
1.
and then tap
(Settings) ➔
Tap Use GPS satellites enable the GPS satellite.
Press
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔
Location and security. For more information, refer to
the center circle adjusts to the center position.
“Enabling a Location source” on page 141.
2.
The Location and Security settings allow you to configure phone
location and security settings.
➔
Enabling the sensor aiding
calibration process a green circle appears on-screen and
Location and Security
Press
Location and security.
(Settings) ➔ Display
Tap Use sensor aiding enhances positioning and save
power while using the sensors.
Using Wireless Networks
Before you use applications such as Google Maps and find your
location or search for places of interest, you must enable the Use
wireless networks option or enable the GPS satellites.
1.
Press
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔
Location and security.
2.
Tap Use wireless networks to enable location information
using the wireless network.
Changing Your Settings
194
Screen Unlock Pattern Settings
5.
Setting an Unlock Pattern
Note: Make sure the Require Pattern field is activated.
1.
Press
➔
and then tap
your finger over adjacent points until the gray trace line
overlaps each point and they are highlighted with a green
circle.
6.
Creating a screen unlock pattern increases security on the
phone. When you enable the User visible pattern field, you will
draw an unlock pattern on the screen whenever you want to
unlock the phone’s buttons or touch screen. When you activate
the User tactile feedback field, you feel vibration as feedback
while drawing the pattern.
(Settings) ➔
Location and security.
Draw your pattern by touching your first on-screen point.
Then, without removing your finger from the screen, drag
To secure data and limit phone access, set the phone to require a
screen unlock pattern each time you turn on the device, or every
time the phone wakes up from sleep mode (when the screen
automatically turns off).
When you have connected at least four dots in a vertical,
horizontal or diagonal direction, lift your finger from the
screen and tap Continue.
7.
Confirm the new pattern by redrawing it and then tapping
Confirm. The Unlock pattern is set.
Changing the Screen Lock Pattern
This feature allows you to change the previously stored unlock
pattern and update it if necessary. This process is similar to
changing your password from time to time.
1.
Press
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔
2.
Tap Set screen lock ➔ Pattern.
3.
Read the instructions then tap Next.
2.
Tap Change screen lock.
4.
Review the onscreen animation procedure for drawing a
3.
Retrace your current pattern on the screen.
pattern and tap Next when you are ready to draw a pattern.
Location and security.
4.
Tap Pattern and repeat steps 4 - 7 from the previous
section.
195
Using Visible a Pattern
Password Lock and Unlock
When enabled, this feature displays the onscreen lock grid that is
used to unlock the phone.
Using Tactile Feedback
When enabled, the User tactile feedback option, you will feel
vibration as feedback while drawing the pattern.
Press
➔
and then tap
2.
Tap Set screen lock.
3.
Tap PIN.
4.
Enter a PIN number using the numeric keypad and touch
Continue to confirm the password.
5.
Confirm the PIN by re-entering it and tap OK to confirm.
Tap Set screen lock.
3.
Tap Password.
and then tap
(Settings) ➔
Enter a password using the keypad and tap Continue to
confirm the password.
5.
Confirm the password by re-entering it and tap OK to
confirm.
Setting up SIM Card Lock
Prevent another user from using your SIM card to make
unauthorized calls or from accessing information stored on your
SIM card by protecting the information using a PIN code.
1.
Press
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔
Location and security.
Your phone now requires you to enter this PIN number in
order to unlock the phone.
➔
2.
(Settings) ➔
Location and security.
Press
Location and security.
4.
PIN Lock and Unlock
1.
1.
2.
Tap Set up SIM card lock.
3.
Tap Lock SIM card, enter your SIM PIN code, then touch OK.
Note: You must activate Lock SIM card before you can change your SIM PIN
code.
Changing Your Settings
196
To change an existing SIM Card PIN:
2.
4.
Tap Change SIM PIN.
5.
Enter the old SIM PIN code and tap OK.
6.
Enter the new SIM PIN code and tap OK.
7.
Re-type the new SIM PIN code and tap OK.
setting.
3.
Password Settings
When you create a phone password you can also configure the
phone to display the password as you type it instead of using an
asterisk (*).
1.
Press
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔
This option allows certain applications to access secure
certificates and other credentials. Certificates and credentials
can be installed to the SD card and password protected.
1.
2.
Activating this feature allows Google to administrate your phone
in a way similar to IT security settings on a corporate PC. This
would be beneficial in the case that your phone was lost or
stolen. The phone could be “deactivated” or “restricted” (through
administration) from a remote location.
➔
and then tap
197
and then tap
(Settings) ➔
Tap Use secure credentials to activate this feature. A check
credentials is active.
3.
Location and security.
➔
Location and security.
Tap Visible passwords to activate this feature.
Press
Press
mark displayed next to the feature indicates secure
Device Administration
1.
Select an administrator device and follow the prompts.
Credential Storage
Location and security.
2.
Tap Select device administrators to begin configuring this
(Settings) ➔
Tap Install encrypted certificates to install encrypted
certificates from the memory (SD) card.
4.
Tap Set password to set or change the credential storage
password.
5.
Tap Clear storage to clear the storage (SD card or phone
memory) of all contents and reset the credentials
password.
Applications
Managing Applications
This phone can be used for Android development. You can write
applications in the SDK and install them on this device, then run
the applications using the hardware, system, and network. This
feature allows you to configure the device for development.
Warning!: Android Dev Phones are not intended for non-developer endusers. Because the device can be configured with system
software not provided by or supported by Google or any other
company, end-users operate these devices at their own risk.
This feature allows you to manage installed applications. You can
view and control currently running services, or use the device for
application development.
You can also view the amount of memory or resources used as
well as the remaining memory and resources for each of the
applications on your phone and clear the data, cache, or defaults.
䊳
Press
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔
Applications ➔ Manage applications.
Unknown Sources
Clearing Application Cache and Data
Before you can download a web application you must enable the
Unknown sources feature (enables downloading). Developers can
use this option to install non-Market applications.
1.
Press
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔
Important!: You must have downloaded applications installed to use this
feature.
1.
Applications.
2.
Tap Unknown sources to active this feature.
Press
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔
Applications ➔ Manage applications.
2.
Tap an application in which to clear the cache or data.
3.
Tap Clear cache, Clear defaults, Force stop, or Show all.
Changing Your Settings
198
Uninstalling Third-party Applications
Moving Third-party Applications to your SD Card
Important!: You must have downloaded applications installed to use this
feature.
1.
Press
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔
Applications ➔ Manage applications.
2.
Tap the Downloaded tab and select your desired
3.
Tap Uninstall (from within the top area of the Application
application.
info page).
4.
At the prompt, tap OK to uninstall the application.
5.
Select a reason for uninstalling the application, then tap
Your phone’s built in memory is augmented by using a microSD
card to store additional data. When the phone’s built-in memory
capacity is reached, it can be possible to move some applications
over to the internal microSD card. Freeing up memory space on
the phone can help avoid any sluggish performance when the
phone has to work harder to manage memory resources.
Important!: Only certain downloaded applications are capable of being
moved from phone to card.
1.
Press
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔
Applications ➔ Manage applications.
2.
Tap the Downloaded tab and select your desired
application.
OK.
3.
Tap Move to USB storage (from within the Storage section
of the Application info page).
Once the application has been moved to the microSD card, this
button now reads “Move to phone”.
199
Android Development
Running Services
The Running services option allows you to view and control
currently running services such as Backup, Google Talk, SNS
(messaging), Swype, and more.
1.
Press
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔
Applications ➔ Running services.
The screen displays all the processes that are running.
2.
Tap a process to stop the process from running.
䊳
Press
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔
Applications ➔ Development.
Important!: These features are used for development purposes only.
USB Debugging
This feature is used for development purposes only.
Allowing Mock Locations
When you stop the process the service or application will
This feature is used for development purposes only.
no longer run until you start the process or application
If you are a developer who is testing a GPS applications using
this device, you can tell the device that the phone is at different
GPS locations. In other words, the phone is allowed to “mock”
the coordinates.
again.
Important!: Stopping a process might have undesirable consequences on the
application.
Changing Your Settings
200
USB Settings
Accounts and Synchronization
This menu selects the method of communication for the USB
port.
Note: Before initiating a USB connection with the phone you must disable the
Bluetooth feature, and/or USB debugging feature.
1.
Press
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔
Applications ➔ USB settings.
2.
Select one of the following USB modes:
• Samsung Kies: connects your phone to a PC and prepares it for a
direct firmware update.
• Media player: connects your phone to a PC in order to synchronize
files with Windows Media Player.
• Mass storage: allows you to use the onboard storage capacity of
the phone to store and upload files. This option allows your
computer to detect the phone as a removable storage drive. For
more information, refer to “Memory Card” on page 49.
• Ask on connection: this default setting provides an on-screen
prompt that allows you to choose from one of the above USB
connection types once a direct USB connection is detected.
201
Your phone provides the ability to synchronize data from a variety
of different sources or sites. These accounts can range from
Google, a Corporate Microsoft Exchange Email Server, and other
social sites such as Facebook, Twitter, and MySpace. Corporate
and Google accounts provide the ability to synchronize Calendar
events and Contacts.
To enable the auto-sync feature:
1.
Press
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔
Accounts and sync.
2.
Tap Auto-sync. A green checkmark indicates the feature is
enabled. This feature enables the synchronization of data
between your phone and external sites or servers.
• The three main components are Contacts Email, and Calendar
Events. Before these can be synchronized, they must be added to
the managed accounts list.
• Background data: allows your phone to use data in the
background.
Synchronizing a Google Account
To configure the Google management settings:
By default, there are no accounts managed by the device. These
must be manually added.
1.
To manage an existing Google account:
2.
1.
Press
➔
and then tap
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔
Accounts and sync.
(Settings) ➔
Accounts and sync.
Press
Tap
within the Google account field to reveal the
account’s synchronization settings screen.
3.
Tap the parameters you wish to synchronize (Sync Books,
2.
Tap Add account ➔ Google.
Sync Contacts, Sync Gmail, or Sync Calendar). A green
3.
Tap Next ➔ Sign in.
checkmark indicates the feature is enabled.
4.
Note: If you do not already have a Google account, tap Create and follow the
on-screen prompts to create your new account.
4.
Touch the Username (@gmail.com) and Password fields
Press
to return to the previous screen.
For more information, refer to “Synchronizing Contacts”
on page 92.
and enter your information.
5.
Tap Sign in. Your phone then communicates with the
Google servers to confirm your information. Your existing
Gmail account then appears within the Manage accounts
area of the screen.
• Any changes or updates to your Gmail account are then
automatically updated to your device.
Changing Your Settings
202
Privacy Settings
Synchronizing Your Corporate Account
By default, there are no Corporate Calendar events managed by
the device. These must be manually added.
Note: Once a corporate email account is created, it is automatically added as
a managed account.
Use the following procedure to configure your phone to
synchronize with a corporate email account.
1.
From the Home screen, tap
(Applications)➔ Settings
Location settings, backup configurations, or reset the phone to
erase all personal data.
䊳
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔
Locate the email account containing the events you wish to
Tap
within the adjacent account field to reveal the
account’s synchronization settings screen.
4.
Toggle the check mark adjacent to either the Sync
Contacts or Sync Calendar fields to manually sync the
account.
203
Press
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔
Privacy.
synchronize.
3.
(Settings) ➔
The phone can be configured to back up your current settings,
application data and settings.
2.
Tap Back up my data to create a backup of your current
phone settings and applications.
Accounts and sync.
2.
and then tap
Mobile Backup and Restore
– or –
Press
➔
Privacy.
1.
➔ Accounts and sync.
Press
3.
Tap Automatic restore to assist in the re-installation of a
previously installed application (including preferences and
data).
Search Settings
Factory Data Reset
From this menu you can reset your phone and sound settings to
the factory default settings.
1.
Press
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔
Privacy. (You will see a disclaimer.)
2.
Tap Factory data reset ➔ Reset phone.
3.
If necessary, enter your password and tap Erase
everything.
The phone resets to the factory default settings
automatically and when finished displays the Home
screen.
SD Card & Phone Storage
From this menu you can view the memory allocation for the
memory card as well as mount or unmount the SD card.
For more information about mounting or unmounting the SD card,
see “Using the SD Card” on page 49.
To view the memory allocation for your external SD card:
䊳
Press
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔
SD card and phone storage.The available memory
displays under the Total space and Available space
You can use your phone's search preferences to configure some
aspects of Google Web search (for example, whether it makes
suggestions below the Quick Search Box as you type), and what
phone features you want to include in searches.
1.
Press
➔
2.
Press
➔ Search settings.
3.
Tap any of the following search parameters to then alter
and then tap
(Search).
the settings:
• Google search opens a screen where you can set your Google
search preferences.
– Show web suggestions: includes search matches from Google’s
online search engine.
– Use My Location: uses your My Location information for Google
search results and services.
– Search history: determines whether you also wish to included
personalized search history results in the list of matches.
– Manage search history: helps to manage the personalized search
history associated with your current registered Google account.
• Searchable items: opens a screen where you can choose the
search categories included in device searches. such as: Web,
Amazon Kindle, Apps, Contacts, Memo, Messaging, Music
Player, Phone, Slacker, or Voice Search.
headings.
Changing Your Settings
204
• Clear shortcuts: erases the history for recently selected search
results.
Language & Keyboard Settings
Swype Settings
For more information, refer to “SWYPE Settings” on page 71.
1.
This setting allows you to configure the language in which to
display the menus. You can also set on-screen keyboard options.
䊳
Press
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔
Language Settings
To set the language that the menus display on the phone:
Press
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔ Locale
and text ➔ Select locale.
2.
Select a language and region from the list.
Select Input Method
There are two input methods available: Swype and Samsung
keypad.
1.
Press
➔
and then tap
and text ➔ Select input method.
2.
205
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔ Locale
and text ➔ Swype.
2.
Tap one of the following Swype preferences to activate the
setting:
Locale and text.
1.
Press
Select an input method.
(Settings) ➔ Locale
• Language: allows you to select the current text input language.
Default language is US English.
• Audio feedback: turns off sounds generated by the Swype
application.
• Vibrate on keypress: activates a vibration sensation as you enter
text using the keypad.
• Show tips: turns on an on-screen flashing indicator that provides
helpful user information.
Swype Advanced settings
Advanced settings provide access to Swype operation
parameters.
• Word suggestion: uses a built-in word database to predict words
while entering text in Swype.
• Auto-spacing: automatically inserts a space between words.
When you finish a word, just lift your finger or stylus and start the
next word.
• Auto-capitalization: automatically capitalizes the first letter of a
sentence.
• Show complete trace: determines whether or not to display the
complete Swype trace path on-screen.
• Speed vs. accuracy: sets how quickly Swype responds to
on-screen input. Move the slider between Fast Response (speed) or
Error Tolerant (accuracy) and tap OK.
• Personal dictionary: allows you to manage your personal
dictionary.
• Reset Swype’s dictionary: allows you to reset the entries from
your Swype dictionary.
• Tutorial: provides an on-screen tutorial that shows you how to input
text faster in Swype input mode.
About
Provides information about the current Swype application
version.
Samsung Keyboard Settings
For more information, refer to “The Samsung Keypad” on
page 76.
1.
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔
Locale and text ➔ Samsung keypad.
2.
Tap Portrait Keypad types and select a text input method:
• Qwerty Keypad
• 3x4 Keypad
3. Tap Input languages and select a language.
4.
Tap XT9 to use XT9 Predictive text method. For more
information, refer to “XT9 Advanced Settings” on
Swype Help settings
Help settings provide access to Swype help operation
parameters.
• Swype help: displays the on-screen Swype User Manual.
Press
page 207. For more information, refer to “Text Input
Methods” on page 70.
5.
Tap the Keypad sweeping field if you want to sweep the
keypad and change from ABC to ?123 mode. For more
information, refer to “Text Input Methods” on page 70.
Changing Your Settings
206
6.
7.
Tap the Auto-capitalization field to automatically capitalize
4.
typographical errors by selecting from a list of possible
Tap Voice input to activate the Voice input feature. This is
words that reflect the characters of the keys you touched
as well as the characters of nearby keys.
an experimental feature that uses Google’s networked
speech recognition application.
8.
9.
5.
tapping the space bar twice.
6.
Tap the Auto-append field to automatically add predictions.
Tap the Tutorial field to view a short tutorial on use of the
7.
Tap the Auto-substitution field to automatically replace
words that you are typing. This option assists with
correcting misspelled words.
XT9 Advanced Settings
The following XT9 Advanced settings are available when the XT9
field is selected.
Tap the Word completion field to enable word completion.
Your phone predicts how to complete the word typed.
3.
207
8.
Tap the Word completion point field then tap 2 letters,
Tap the Regional correction field. This option sets the
device to automatically correct mistyped words according
to normal spelling for your region.
Tap the XT9 field to select XT9 (predictive text) mode, then
tap XT9 advanced settings.
2.
Tap the Next word prediction field to enable word
prediction.
Tap Auto-full stop to automatically insert a full stop by
Samsung keyboard.
1.
Tap the Spell correction field. This option corrects
the first letter of a sentence.
9.
Tap the Recapture field. This option sets the device to
re-display the word suggestion list when you select the
wrong word from the list.
10. To add a new word to the T9 dictionary:
3 letters, 4 letters, or the 5 letters radio button. Word
Tap the XT9 my words field, then press
completion begins after 2 or more (depending on your
Add. Enter the new word in the Register to XT9 my words
and then tap
selection).
field, then tap Done.
11. Tap XT9 auto-substitution to add words to substitute (for
example youve becomes you’ve). A list of substitutions
displays.
12. If you do not see the substitution you want, press
and
then tap Add, then input the Shortcut word and
Substitution word.
13. Tap Done.
Voice Input and Output Settings
Configuring Text-to-speech
Configuring Voice Input Recognition
This feature allows the phone to correctly recognize verbal input.
1.
Press
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔
Voice input and output ➔ Voice recognition settings.
2.
• Block offensive words: allows you to block recognition of known
offensive words or language. (A green check mark indicates the
feature is active).
• Personalized recognition: improves the accuracy of the speech
recognition functionality.
• Google Account dashboard: allows you to manage your collected
Google data online. You will be asked to provide your login
information.
3. Press
to return to the previous screen.
This feature allows the phone to provide a verbal readout of
on-screen data such as messages and incoming caller
information.
1.
• Language: selects an input language and associated dialect
recognition (if available).
• SafeSearch: sets the explicit image filter settings. These settings
apply to only Google voice search results. Choose from: Off,
Moderate, or Strict.
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔
Voice input and output ➔ Text-to-speech settings.
Configure the available options to alter the settings
associated with this feature:
Press
2.
Configure the available options to alter the settings
associated with this feature:
• Listen to an example: plays a short example of what the text-tospeech feature sounds like on your device when activated.
• Driving mode: incoming calls and new notifications are
automatically ready out loud.
Changing Your Settings
208
• Always use my settings: accepts an override of application
settings with personal configurations for this text-to-speech settings
screen. If enabled, your device defaults to using the text-to-speech
feature.
• Default engine: sets the speech synthesis engine that will be used
for the spoken text. Choices include: Pico TTS.
• Install voice data: confirms the installation of necessary data
required for voice synthesis.
• Speech rate: adjusts the rate at which on-screen text is spoken by
the device. Choose from: Very slow, Slow, Normal, Fast, and Very
fast.
• Language: assigns the language used for verbal readout. Choose
from American English or Spanish.
• Pico TTS: configures the pico TTS settings for various languages.
This service is able to collect all the text you type, including
personal data credit card numbers except passwords. It may also
log your user interface interactions. It comes from the
applications such as KickBack, SoundBack, and TalkBack.
Press
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔
Accessibility.
Note: Initially, it might be necessary to download accessibility applications
from the Android Market.
209
Tap Accessibility to activate the feature, then select the
services for which you want data to log.
Note: The
(power key) ends all calls.
Date and Time
This menu allows you to change the current time and date
displayed.
1.
Press
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔
Date and time.
2.
Tap Automatic to allow the network set the date and time.
Important!: Deactivate Automatic to manually set the rest of the options.
Accessibility Settings
1.
2.
3.
Tap Set date and use the plus or minus icons to set the
Month, Day, and Year then touch Set.
4.
Tap Select time zone, then tap a time zone.
5.
Tap Set time and use the plus or minus icons, set Hour, and
Minute. Tap PM or AM, then tap Set.
• Optional: Touch Use 24-hour format. If this is not selected the
phone automatically uses a 12-hour format.
6. Tap Select date format and tap the date format type.
About Phone
• System tutorial: provides a quick, online tutorial that walks you
through basic phone features. Read the on-screen information and
follow the system prompts.
• Model number: displays the phone’s model number.
• Firmware version: displays the firmware version loaded on this
handset.
• Baseband version: displays the baseband version loaded on this
handset.
• Kernel version: displays the kernel version loaded on this handset.
• Build number: displays the software, build number.
This menu contains legal information, system tutorial
information, and other phone information such as the model
number, firmware version, baseband version, kernel version, and
software build number.
To access phone information:
䊳
Press
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔ About
phone. The following information displays:
• Status: displays the Battery status, the Battery Level (percentage),
the Phone number for this device, the Network connection, Signal
strength, Mobile network type, Service state, Roaming status,
Mobile network state, IMEI number, IMEI SV, Wi-Fi MAC address,
Bluetooth address, and Up time.
• Battery use: displays the applications or services (in percentages)
that are using battery power.
• Legal information: This option displays information about Open
source licenses, License settings, as well as Google legal
information. This information clearly provides copyright and
distribution legal information and facts as well as Google Terms of
Service, Terms of Service for Android-powered Phones, and much
more pertinent information as a reference.
Read the information and terms, then press BACK to return to the
Settings menu.
Note: Firmware, baseband, kernel and build numbers are usually used for
updates to the handset or support. For additional information please
contact your T-Mobile service representative.
Software Update
The Software Update feature enables you to use your phone to
connect to the network and upload any new phone software
directly to your phone. The phone automatically updates with the
latest available software when you access this option.
䊳
Press
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔
Software update.
The phone automatically updates the software (if
available).
Changing Your Settings
210
Section 13: Health and Safety Information
This section outlines the safety precautions associated with using
your phone. The terms “mobile device” or “cell phone” are used
in this section to refer to your phone. Read this information before
using your mobile device.
Exposure to Radio Frequency (RF) Signals
The U.S. Food and Drug Administration (FDA) has published
information for consumers relating to Radio Frequency (RF)
exposure from wireless phones. The FDA publication includes the
following information:
Do cell phones pose a health hazard?
Many people are concerned that cell phone radiation will cause
cancer or other serious health hazards. The weight of scientific
evidence has not linked cell phones with any health problems.
Cell phones emit low levels of Radio Frequency (RF) energy. Over
the past 15 years, scientists have conducted hundreds of studies
looking at the biological effects of the radio frequency energy
emitted by cell phones. While some researchers have reported
biological changes associated with RF energy, these studies have
failed to be replicated. The majority of studies published have
failed to show an association between exposure to radio
frequency from a cell phone and health problems.
211
The low levels of RF cell phones emit while in use are in the
microwave frequency range. They also emit RF at substantially
reduced time intervals when in the stand-by mode. Whereas high
levels of RF can produce health effects (by heating tissue),
exposure to low level RF that does not produce heating effects
causes no known adverse health effects.
The biological effects of radio frequency energy should not be
confused with the effects from other types of electromagnetic
energy.
Very high levels of electromagnetic energy, such as is found in Xrays and gamma rays, can ionize biological tissues. Ionization is
a process where electrons are stripped away from their normal
locations in atoms and molecules. It can permanently damage
biological tissues including DNA, the genetic material.
The energy levels associated with radio frequency energy,
including both radio waves and microwaves, are not great
enough to cause ionization of atoms and molecules. Therefore,
RF energy is a type of non-ionizing radiation. Other types of nonionizing radiation include visible light, infrared radiation (heat),
and other forms of electromagnetic radiation with relatively low
frequencies.
While RF energy does not ionize particles, large amounts can
increase body temperatures and cause tissue damage. Two
areas of the body, the eyes and the testes, are particularly
vulnerable to RF heating because there is relatively little blood
flow in them to carry away excess heat.
Research Results to Date: Is there a connection between
RF and certain health problems?
The results of most studies conducted to date say no. In addition,
attempts to replicate and confirm the few studies that have
shown a connection have failed.
The scientific community at large therefore believes that the
weight of scientific evidence does not show an association
between exposure to Radio Frequency (RF) from cell phones and
adverse health outcomes. Still the scientific community has
supported additional research to address gaps in knowledge.
Some of these studies are described below.
Interphone Study
Interphone is a large international study designed to determine
whether cell phones increase the risk of head and neck cancer. A
report published in the International Journal of Epidemiology
(June, 2010) compared cell phone usage for more than 5,000
people with brain tumors (glioma and meningioma) and a similar
number of healthy controls.
Results of this study did NOT show that cell phones caused brain
cancer. In this study, most people had no increased risk of brain
cancer from using cell phones. For people with the heaviest use
of cell phones (an average of more than ½ hour per day, every
day, for over 10 years) the study suggested a slight increase in
brain cancer. However, the authors determined that biases and
errors prevented any conclusions being drawn from this data.
Additional information about Interphone can be found at
http://com.iarc.fr/en/media-centre/pr/.
Interphone is the largest cell phone study to date, but it did not
answer all questions about cell phone safety. Additional research
is being conducted around the world, and the FDA continues to
monitor developments in this field.
International Cohort Study on Mobile Phone Users (COSMOS)
The COSMOS study aims to conduct long-term health monitoring
of a large group of people to determine if there are any health
issues linked to long-term exposure to radio frequency energy
from cell phone use. The COSMOS study will follow
approximately 300,000 adult cell phone users in Europe for 20 to
30 years. Additional information about the COSMOS study can be
found at http://www.ukcosmos.org/index.html.
Health and Safety Information
212
Risk of Brain Cancer from Exposure to Radio Frequency Fields
in Childhood and Adolescence (MOBI-KIDS)
MOBI-KIDS is an international study investigating the relationship
between exposure to radio frequency energy from
communication technologies including cell phones and brain
cancer in young people. This is an international multi-center
study involving 14 European and non-European countries.
Additional information about MOBI-KIDS can be found at
http://www.creal.cat/programes-recerca/en_projectes-creal/
view.php?ID=39.
Surveillance, Epidemiology, and End Results (SEER) Program
of the National Cancer Institute
The National Cancer Institute (NCI) actively follows cancer
statistics in the United States to detect any change in rates of
new cases for brain cancer. If cell phones play a role in risk for
brain cancer, rates should go up, because heavy cell phone use
has been common for quite some time in the U.S. Between 1987
and 2005, the overall age-adjusted incidence of brain cancer did
not increase. Additional information about SEER can be found at
http://seer.cancer.gov/.
213
Cell Phone Industry Actions
Although the existing scientific data do not justify FDA regulatory
actions, the FDA has urged the cell phone industry to take a
number of steps, including the following:
• Support-needed research on possible biological effects of RF for
the type of signal emitted by cell phones;
• Design cell phones in a way that minimizes any RF exposure to the
user; and
• Cooperate in providing users of cell phones with the current
information on cell phone use and human health concerns.
The FDA also is working with voluntary standard-setting bodies
such as the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
(IEEE), the International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation
Protection (ICNIRP), and others to assure that safety standards
continue to adequately protect the public.
Reducing Exposure: Hands-Free Kits and Other
Accessories
Steps to Reduce Exposure to Radio Frequency Energy
If there is a risk from being exposed to radio frequency energy
(RF) from cell phones - and at this point we do not know that
there is - it is probably very small. But, if you are concerned
about avoiding even potential risks, you can take a few simple
steps to minimize your RF exposure.
• Reduce the amount of time spent using your cell phone;
• Use speaker mode or a headset to place more distance between your
head and the cell phone.
Hands-Free Kits
Hands-free kits may include audio or Bluetooth® headsets and
various types of body-worn accessories such as belt-clips and
holsters. Combinations of these can be used to reduce RF energy
absorption from cell phones.
Headsets can substantially reduce exposure because the phone
is held away from the head in the user's hand or in approved
body-worn accessories. Cell phones marketed in the U.S. are
required to meet RF exposure compliance requirements when
used against the head and against the body.
Because there are no known risks from exposure to RF emissions
from cell phones, there is no reason to believe that hands-free
kits reduce risks. Hands-free kits can be used for convenience
and comfort. They are also required by law in many states if you
want to use your phone while driving.
Cell Phone Accessories that Claim to Shield the Head from
RF Radiation
Because there are no known risks from exposure to RF emissions
from cell phones, there is no reason to believe that accessories
which claim to shield the head from those emissions reduce
risks. Some products that claim to shield the user from RF
absorption use special phone cases, while others involve nothing
more than a metallic accessory attached to the phone. Studies
have shown that these products generally do not work as
advertised. Unlike “hands-free” kits, these so-called “shields”
may interfere with proper operation of the phone. The phone may
be forced to boost its power to compensate, leading to an
increase in RF absorption.
Children and Cell Phones
The scientific evidence does not show a danger to any users of
cell phones from RF exposure, including children and teenagers.
The steps adults can take to reduce RF exposure apply to
children and teenagers as well.
• Reduce the amount of time spent on the cell phone;
Health and Safety Information
214
• Use speaker mode or a headset to place more distance between the
head and the cell phone.
Some groups sponsored by other national governments have
advised that children be discouraged from using cell phones at
all. For example, The Stewart Report from the United Kingdom
made such a recommendation in December 2000. In this report,
a group of independent experts noted that no evidence exists that
using a cell phone causes brain tumors or other ill effects. Their
recommendation to limit cell phone use by children was strictly
precautionary; it was not based on scientific evidence that any
health hazard exists.
Additional information on the safety of RF exposures from various
sources can be obtained from the following organizations
(updated 10/1/2010):
• FCC RF Safety Program:
http://www.fcc.gov/oet/rfsafety/.
• Environmental Protection Agency (EPA):
http://www.epa.gov/radtown/wireless-tech.html.
• Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA):
http://www.osha.gov/SLTC/radiofrequencyradiation/.
(Note: This web address is case sensitive.)
• National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH):
http://www.cdc.gov/niosh/.
215
• World Health Organization (WHO):
http://www.who.int/peh-emf/en/.
• International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection:
http://www.icnirp.de.
• Health Protection Agency:
http://www.hpa.org.uk/Topics/Radiation/.
• US Food and Drug Administration:
http://www.fda.gov/Radiation-EmittingProducts/
RadiationEmittingProductsandProcedures/
HomeBusinessandEntertainment/CellPhones/default.htm.
Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) Certification
Information
Your wireless phone is a radio transmitter and receiver. It is
designed and manufactured not to exceed the exposure limits for
Radio Frequency (RF) energy set by the Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) of the U.S. Government.
These FCC exposure limits are derived from the
recommendations of two expert organizations: the National
Council on Radiation Protection and Measurement (NCRP) and
the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE).
In both cases, the recommendations were developed by scientific
and engineering experts drawn from industry, government, and
academia after extensive reviews of the scientific literature
related to the biological effects of RF energy.
The exposure limit set by the FCC for wireless mobile phones
employs a unit of measurement known as the Specific
Absorption Rate (SAR). The SAR is a measure of the rate of
absorption of RF energy by the human body expressed in units of
watts per kilogram (W/kg). The FCC requires wireless phones to
comply with a safety limit of 1.6 watts per kilogram (1.6 W/kg).
For body-worn operation, this phone has been tested and meets
FCC RF exposure guidelines when used with an accessory that
contains no metal and that positions the mobile device a
minimum of 1.0 cm from the body.
The FCC exposure limit incorporates a substantial margin of
safety to give additional protection to the public and to account
for any variations in measurements.
The FCC has granted an Equipment Authorization for this mobile
phone with all reported SAR levels evaluated as in compliance
with the FCC RF exposure guidelines. The maximum SAR values
for this model phone as reported in the FCC equipment
authorization grant is:
• Head: 0.90 W/Kg.
• Body-worn: 1.23 W/Kg.
SAR tests are conducted using standard operating positions
accepted by the FCC with the phone transmitting at its highest
certified power level in all tested frequency bands. Although the
SAR is determined at the highest certified power level, the actual
SAR level of the phone while operating can be well below the
maximum value. This is because the phone is designed to
operate at multiple power levels so as to use only the power
required to reach the network. In general, the closer you are to a
wireless base station antenna, the lower the power output.
Before a new model phone is available for sale to the public, it
must be tested and certified to the FCC that it does not exceed
the exposure limit established by the FCC. Tests for each model
phone are performed in positions and locations (e.g. at the ear
and worn on the body) as required by the FCC.
Use of other accessories may not ensure compliance with FCC RF
exposure guidelines.
2.4GHz WLAN
• Head: 0.11 W/Kg.
• Body-worn: 0.12 W/Kg.
SAR information on this and other model phones can be viewed
online at http://www.fcc.gov/oet/ea. To find information that
pertains to a particular model phone, this site uses the phone
FCC ID number which is usually printed somewhere on the case
of the phone.
Sometimes it may be necessary to remove the battery pack to
find the number. Once you have the FCC ID number for a
Health and Safety Information
216
particular phone, follow the instructions on the website and it
should provide values for typical or maximum SAR for a particular
phone. Additional product specific SAR information can also be
obtained at www.fcc.gov/cgb/sar.
FCC Part 15 Information to User:
Pursuant to part 15.21 of the FCC Rules, you are cautioned that
changes or modifications not expressly approved by Samsung
could void your authority to operate the device.
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is
subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not
cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with
the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the
FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable
protection against harmful interference in a residential
installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate
radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful
interference to radio communications. However, there is no
guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular
installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to
radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning
217
the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct
the interference by one or more of the following measures:
-Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
-Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
-Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from
that to which the receiver is connected.
-Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for
help.
Smart Practices While Driving
On the Road - Off the Phone
The primary responsibility of every driver is the safe operation of
his or her vehicle.
Responsible drivers understand that no secondary task should be
performed while driving whether it be eating, drinking, talking to
passengers, or talking on a mobile phone - unless the driver has
assessed the driving conditions and is confident that the
secondary task will not interfere with their primary responsibility.
Do not engage in any activity while driving a moving vehicle which
may cause you to take your eyes off the road or become so
absorbed in the activity that your ability to concentrate on the act
of driving becomes impaired. Samsung is committed to promoting
responsible driving and giving drivers the tools they need to
understand and address distractions.
Check the laws and regulations on the use of mobile devices and
their accessories in the areas where you drive. Always obey them.
The use of these devices may be prohibited or restricted in certain
areas. For example, only hands-free use may be permitted in
certain areas.
Before answering calls, consider your circumstances. Let the call
go to voicemail when driving conditions require. Remember,
driving comes first, not the call!
If you consider a call necessary and appropriate, follow these
tips:
• Use a hands-free device;
• Secure your phone within easy reach;
• Place calls when you are not moving;
• Plan calls when your car will be stationary;
• Do not engage in stressful or emotional conversations;
• Let the person with whom you are speaking know that you are driving
and will suspend the call if necessary;
• Do not take notes or look up phone numbers while driving;
Notice regarding legal restrictions on mounting this device in an
automobile:
automobile. Be sure to consult the state and local laws or
ordinances where you drive before mounting this device in an
automobile. Failure to comply with these restrictions could result
in fines, penalties, or other damages.
Never mount this device in a manner that will obstruct the
driver's clear view of the street and traffic.
Never use wireless data services such as text messaging, Web
browsing, or e-mail while operating a vehicle.
Never watch videos, such as a movie or clip, or play video games
while operating a vehicle.
For more information, go to http://www.ctia.org.
Battery Use and Safety
Important!: Handle and store batteries properly to avoid injury or damage.
Most battery issues arise from improper handling of batteries
and, particularly, from the continued use of damaged batteries.
• Do not disassemble, crush, puncture, shred, or otherwise attempt
to change the form of your battery. Do not put a high degree of
pressure on the battery. This can cause leakage or an internal shortcircuit, resulting in overheating.
Laws in some states may prohibit mounting this device on or
near the windshield of an automobile. In other states, the law
may permit mounting this device only in specific locations in the
Health and Safety Information
218
• Do not let the phone or battery come in contact with liquids.
Liquids can get into the phone's circuits, leading to corrosion. Even
when the phone appears to be dry and appears to operate normally,
the circuitry could slowly corrode and pose a safety hazard. If the
phone and/or battery get wet, have them checked by your service
provider or contact Samsung, even if they appear to be working
properly.
• Do not place your battery in or near a heat source. Excessive
heating can damage the phone or the battery and could cause the
phone or the battery to explode. Do not dry a wet or damp battery with
an appliance or heat source such as a microwave oven, hair dryer,
iron, or radiator. Avoid leaving your phone in your car in high
temperatures.
• Do not dispose of the phone or the battery in a fire. The phone or
the battery may explode when overheated.
• Do not handle a damaged or leaking battery. Do not let leaking
battery fluid come in contact with your eyes, skin or clothing. For safe
disposal options, contact your nearest Samsung-authorized service
center.
• Avoid dropping the cell phone. Dropping the phone or the battery,
especially on a hard surface, can potentially cause damage to the
phone and battery. If you suspect damage to the phone or battery, take
it to a service center for inspection.
• Never use any charger or battery that is damaged in any way.
219
• Do not allow the battery to touch metal objects. Accidental
short-circuiting can occur when a metallic object (coin, key, jewelry,
clip, or pen) causes a direct connection between the + and - terminals
of the battery (metal strips on the battery), for example when you carry
a spare battery in a pocket or bag. Short-circuiting the terminals may
damage the battery or the object causing the short-circuiting.
Important!: Important: Use only Samsung-approved batteries, and recharge
your battery only with Samsung-approved chargers which are
specifically designed for your phone.
Warning!: Warning: Use of a non-Samsung-approved battery or charger may
present a risk of fire, explosion, leakage, or other hazard.
Samsung's warranty does not cover damage to the phone caused
by non-Samsung-approved batteries and/or chargers.
• Do not use incompatible cell phone batteries and chargers. Some
websites and second-hand dealers not associated with reputable
manufacturers and carriers, might be selling incompatible or even
counterfeit batteries and chargers. Consumers should purchase
manufacturer or carrier-recommended products and accessories. If
unsure about whether a replacement battery or charger is compatible,
contact the manufacturer of the battery or charger.
• Misuse or use of incompatible phones, batteries, and charging
devices could result in damage to the equipment and a possible
risk of fire, explosion, or leakage, leading to serious injuries,
damages to your phone, or other serious hazard.
Samsung Mobile Products and Recycling
Samsung cares for the environment and encourages its
customers to recycle Samsung mobile devices and genuine
Samsung accessories.
Proper disposal of your mobile device and its battery is not only
important for safety, it benefits the environment. Batteries must
be recycled or disposed of properly.
Recycling programs for your mobile device, batteries, and
accessories may not be available in your area.
We've made it easy for you to recycle your old Samsung mobile
device by working with respected take-back companies in every
state in the country.
Drop It Off
You can drop off your Samsung-branded mobile device and
batteries for recycling at one of our numerous Samsung
Recycling Direct (SM) locations. A list of these locations may
be found at: http://pages.samsung.com/us/recyclingdirect/
usactivities_environment_samsungrecyclingdirect_locations.jsp.
Samsung-branded devices and batteries will be accepted at
these locations for no fee.
Consumers may also recycle their used mobile device or
batteries at many retail or carrier-provided locations where
mobile devices and batteries are sold. Additional information
regarding specific locations may be found at:
http://www.epa.gov/epawaste/partnerships/plugin/cellphone/
index.htm or at http://www.call2recycle.org/.
Mail It In
The Samsung Mobile Take-Back Program will provide
Samsung customers with a free recycling mailing label. Just
go to
http://www.samsung.com/us/aboutsamsung/citizenship/
usactivities_environment_samsungrecyclingdirect.html?INT=STA_r
ecyle_your_phone_page and follow the instructions to print out
a free pre-paid postage label and then send your old mobile
device or battery to the address listed, via U.S. Mail, for
recycling.
Dispose of unwanted electronics through an approved
recycler.
To find the nearest recycling location, go to our website:
www.samsung.com/recyclingdirect
Or call, (877) 278-0799.
Follow local regulations regarding disposal of mobile devices
and batteries
Dispose of your mobile device and batteries in accordance with
local regulations. In some areas, the disposal of these items in
Health and Safety Information
220
household or business trash may be prohibited. Help us protect
the environment - recycle!
Warning!: Never dispose of batteries in a fire because they may explode.
UL Certified Travel Charger
The Travel Charger for this phone has met applicable UL safety
requirements. Please adhere to the following safety instructions
per UL guidelines:
FAILURE TO FOLLOW THE INSTRUCTIONS OUTLINED MAY
Please note the following information when using your mobile
device:
WARNING REGARDING DISPLAY
The display on your mobile device is made of glass or
acrylic and could break if your mobile device is dropped or
if it receives significant impact. Do not use if screen is
broken or cracked as this could cause injury to you.
LEAD TO SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY AND POSSIBLE
WARRANTY DISCLAIMER: PROPER USE OF A TOUCH-SCREEN
PROPERTY DAMAGE.
MOBILE DEVICE
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS - SAVE THESE
If your mobile device has a touch-screen display, please
INSTRUCTIONS.
note that a touch-screen responds best to a light touch
DANGER - TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC
SHOCK, CAREFULLY FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS.
FOR CONNECTION TO A SUPPLY NOT IN NORTH
AMERICA, USE AN ATTACHMENT PLUG ADAPTOR OF
THE PROPER CONFIGURATION FOR THE POWER
OUTLET.
THIS POWER UNIT IS INTENDED TO BE CORRECTLY
ORIENTED IN A VERTICAL OR HORIZONTAL OR FLOOR
MOUNT POSITION.
221
Display / Touch-Screen
from the pad of your finger or a non-metallic stylus. Using
excessive force or a metallic object when pressing on the
touch-screen may damage the tempered glass surface
and void the warranty. For more information, please refer
to the “Standard Limited Warranty” on page 232.
GPS & AGPS
Certain Samsung mobile devices can use a Global Positioning
System (GPS) signal for location-based applications. A GPS uses
satellites controlled by the U.S. Government that are subject to
changes implemented in accordance with the Department of
Defense policy and the 2008 Federal Radio navigation Plan (FRP).
Changes may affect the performance of location-based
technology on your mobile device.
Certain Samsung mobile devices can also use an Assisted Global
Positioning System (AGPS), which obtains information from the
cellular network to improve GPS performance. AGPS uses your
wireless service provider's network and therefore airtime, data
charges, and/or additional charges may apply in accordance with
your service plan. Contact your wireless service provider for
details.
Your Location
Location-based information includes information that can be
used to determine the approximate location of a mobile device.
Mobile devices which are connected to a wireless network
transmit location-based information. Additionally, if you use
applications that require location-based information (e.g. driving
directions), such applications transmit location-based
information. The location-based information may be shared with
third-parties, including your wireless service provider,
applications providers, Samsung, and other third-parties
providing services.
Use of AGPS in Emergency Calls
When you make an emergency call, the cellular network may
activate AGPS technology in your mobile device to tell the
emergency responders your approximate location.
AGPS has limitations and might not work in your area. Therefore:
• Always tell the emergency responder your location to the best of your
ability; and
• Remain on the mobile device for as long as the emergency responder
instructs you.
Navigation
Maps, directions, and other navigation data may contain
inaccurate or incomplete data, and circumstances can and do
change over time. In some areas, complete information may not
be available. Therefore, you should always visually confirm that
the navigational instructions are consistent with what you see
before following them. All users should pay attention to road
conditions, closures, traffic, and all other factors that may impact
safe driving or walking. Always obey posted road signs.
Health and Safety Information
222
Emergency Calls
This mobile device, like any wireless mobile device, operates
using radio signals, wireless and landline networks, as well as
user-programmed functions, which cannot guarantee connection
in all conditions, areas, or circumstances. Therefore, you should
never rely solely on any wireless mobile device for essential
communications (medical emergencies, for example). Before
traveling in remote or underdeveloped areas, plan an alternate
method of contacting emergency services personnel. Remember,
to make or receive any calls, the mobile device must be switched
on and in a service area with adequate signal strength.
Emergency calls may not be possible on all wireless mobile
device networks or when certain network services and/or mobile
device features are in use. Check with local service providers.
To make an emergency call:
Care and Maintenance
Your mobile device is a product of superior design and
craftsmanship and should be treated with care. The suggestions
below will help you fulfill any warranty obligations and allow you
to enjoy this product for many years:
Keep your Samsung Mobile Device away from:
Liquids of any kind
1.
If the phone is not on, switch it on.
2.
From the Home screen, tap
. Enter the emergency
number for your present location (for example, 911 or
other official emergency number), then tap
Emergency numbers vary by location.
223
If certain features are in use (call blocking, for example), you may
first need to deactivate those features before you can make an
emergency call. Consult your User Manual and your local cellular
service provider. When making an emergency call, remember to
give all the necessary information as accurately as possible.
Remember that your mobile device may be the only means of
communication at the scene of an accident; do not cut off the call
until given permission to do so.
Call
.
Keep the mobile device dry. Precipitation, humidity, and
liquids contain minerals that will corrode electronic circuits. If
the mobile device does get wet, do not accelerate drying with
the use of an oven, microwave, or dryer, because this may
damage the mobile device and could cause a fire or
explosion. Do not use the mobile device with a wet hand.
Doing so may cause an electric shock to you or damage to
the mobile device.
Extreme heat or cold
Responsible Listening
Avoid temperatures below 0°C / 32°F or above 45°C / 113°F.
Microwaves
Do not try to dry your mobile device in a microwave oven.
Doing so may cause a fire or explosion.
Dust and dirt
Do not expose your mobile device to dust, dirt, or sand.
Cleaning solutions
Do not use harsh chemicals, cleaning solvents, or strong
detergents to clean the mobile device. Wipe it with a soft
cloth slightly dampened in a mild soap-and-water solution.
Shock or vibration
Do not drop, knock, or shake the mobile device. Rough
handling can break internal circuit boards.
Paint
Do not paint the mobile device. Paint can clog the device’s
moving parts or ventilation openings and prevent proper
operation.
Caution!: Avoid potential hearing loss.
Damage to hearing occurs when a person is exposed to loud
sounds over time. The risk of hearing loss increases as sound is
played louder and for longer durations. Prolonged exposure to
loud sounds (including music) is the most common cause of
preventable hearing loss. Some scientific research suggests that
using portable audio devices, such as portable music players and
cell phones, at high volume settings for long durations may lead
to permanent noise-induced hearing loss. This includes the use
of headphones (including headsets, earbuds, and Bluetooth® or
other wireless devices). Exposure to very loud sound has also
been associated in some studies with tinnitus (a ringing in the
ear), hypersensitivity to sound, and distorted hearing. Individual
susceptibility to noise-induced hearing loss and potential hearing
problem varies. Additionally, the amount of sound produced by a
portable audio device varies depending on the nature of the
sound, the device settings, and the headphones that are used. As
a result, there is no single volume setting that is appropriate for
everyone or for every combination of sound, settings, and
equipment.
Health and Safety Information
224
You should follow some common sense recommendations when
using any portable audio device:
• Always turn the volume down before plugging the earphones into an
audio source.
• Set the volume in a quiet environment and select the lowest volume at
which you can hear adequately.
• Be aware that you can adapt to higher volume settings over time, not
realizing that the higher volume may be harmful to your hearing.
• When using headphones, turn the volume down if you cannot hear the
people speaking near you or if the person sitting next to you can hear
what you are listening to.
• Do not turn the volume up to block out noisy surroundings. If you
choose to listen to your portable device in a noisy environment, use
noise-cancelling headphones to block out background environmental
noise. By blocking background environment noise, noise cancelling
headphones should allow you to hear the music at lower volumes than
when using earbuds.
• Limit the amount of time you listen. As the volume increases, less time
is required before you hearing could be affected.
• Avoid using headphones after exposure to extremely loud noises, such
as rock concerts, that might cause temporary hearing loss. Temporary
hearing loss might cause unsafe volumes to sound normal.
• Do not listen at any volume that causes you discomfort. If you
experience ringing in your ears, hear muffled speech, or experience
225
any temporary hearing difficulty after listening to your portable audio
device, discontinue use and consult your doctor.
You can obtain additional information on this subject from the
following sources:
American Academy of Audiology
11730 Plaza American Drive, Suite 300
Reston, VA 20190
Voice: (800) 222-2336
Email: [email protected]
Internet: http://www.audiology.org/Pages/default.aspx
National Institute on Deafness and Other Communication Disorders
National Institutes of Health
31 Center Drive, MSC 2320
Bethesda, MD 20892-2320
Email: [email protected]
Internet: http://www.nidcd.nih.gov/
National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH)
395 E Street, S.W.
Suite 9200
Patriots Plaza Building
Washington, DC 20201
Voice: 1-800-35-NIOSH (1-800-356-4674)
1-800-CDC-INFO (1-800-232-4636)
Outside the U.S. 513-533-8328
Email: [email protected]
Internet: http://www.cdc.gov/niosh/topics/noise/default.html
1-888-232-6348 TTY
Operating Environment
Remember to follow any special regulations in force in any area,
and always switch your mobile device off whenever it is
forbidden to use it, or when it may cause interference or danger.
When connecting the mobile device or any accessory to another
device, read its user's guide for detailed safety instructions. Do
not connect incompatible products.
Using Your Mobile Device Near Other Electronic Devices
Most modern electronic equipment is shielded from Radio
Frequency (RF) signals. However, certain electronic equipment
may not be shielded against the RF signals from your wireless
mobile device. Consult the manufacturer to discuss alternatives.
Implantable Medical Devices
A minimum separation of six (6) inches should be maintained
between a handheld wireless mobile device and an implantable
medical device, such as a pacemaker or implantable cardioverter
defibrillator, to avoid potential interference with the device.
Persons who have such devices:
• Should ALWAYS keep the mobile device more than six (6) inches from
their implantable medical device when the mobile device is turned ON;
• Should not carry the mobile device in a breast pocket;
• Should use the ear opposite the implantable medical device to
minimize the potential for interference;
• Should turn the mobile device OFF immediately if there is any reason
to suspect that interference is taking place;
• Should read and follow the directions from the manufacturer of your
implantable medical device. If you have any questions about using
your wireless mobile device with an implantable medical device,
consult your health care provider.
Health and Safety Information
226
For more information see: http://www.fcc.gov/oet/rfsafety/rffaqs.html#.
Other Medical Devices
If you use any other personal medical devices, consult the
manufacturer of your device to determine if it is adequately
shielded from external RF energy. Your physician may be able to
assist you in obtaining this information. Switch your mobile
device off in health care facilities when any regulations posted in
these areas instruct you to do so. Hospitals or health care
facilities may be using equipment that could be sensitive to
external RF energy.
Vehicles
RF signals may affect improperly installed or inadequately
shielded electronic systems in motor vehicles. Check with the
manufacturer or its representative regarding your vehicle before
using your mobile device in a motor vehicle. You should also
consult the manufacturer of any equipment that has been added
to your vehicle.
Posted Facilities
Switch your mobile device off in any facility where posted notices
require you to do so.
227
Potentially Explosive Environments
Switch your mobile device off when in any area with a potentially
explosive atmosphere and obey all signs and instructions. Sparks
in such areas could cause an explosion or fire resulting in bodily
injury or even death. Users are advised to switch the mobile
device off while at a refueling point (service station). Users are
reminded of the need to observe restrictions on the use of radio
equipment in fuel depots (fuel storage and distribution areas),
chemical plants, or where blasting operations are in progress.
Areas with a potentially explosive atmosphere are often, but not
always, clearly marked. They include below deck on boats,
chemical transfer or storage facilities, vehicles using liquefied
petroleum gas (such as propane or butane), areas where the air
contains chemicals or particles, such as grain, dust, or metal
powders, and any other area where you would normally be
advised to turn off your vehicle engine.
FCC Hearing Aid Compatibility (HAC)
Regulations for Wireless Devices
On July 10, 2003, the U.S. Federal Communications Commission
(FCC) Report and Order in WT Docket 01-309 modified the
exception of wireless mobile devices under the Hearing Aid
Compatibility Act of 1988 (HAC Act) to require digital wireless
mobile devices be compatible with hearing aids.
The intent of the HAC Act is to ensure reasonable access to
telecommunications services for persons with hearing
disabilities. While some wireless mobile devices are used near
some hearing devices (hearing aids and cochlear implants),
users may detect a buzzing, humming, or whining noise. Some
hearing devices are more immune than others to this
interference noise, and mobile devices also vary in the amount of
interference they generate.
The wireless telephone industry has developed a rating system
for wireless mobile devices to assist hearing device users find
mobile devices that may be compatible with their hearing
devices. Not all mobile devices have been rated. Mobile devices
that are rated have the rating on their box or a label located on
the box.
The ratings are not guarantees. Results will vary depending on
the user's hearing device and hearing loss. If your hearing device
happens to be vulnerable to interference, you may not be able to
use a rated mobile device successfully. Trying out the mobile
device with your hearing device is the best way to evaluate it for
your personal needs.
M-Ratings: Mobile devices rated M3 or M4 meet FCC
requirements and are likely to generate less interference to
hearing devices than mobile devices that are not labeled. M4 is
the better/higher of the two ratings.
T-Ratings: Mobile devices rated T3 or T4 meet FCC requirements
and are likely to generate less interference to hearing devices
than mobile devices that are not labeled. T4 is the better/higher
of the two ratings.
Hearing devices may also be rated. Your hearing device
manufacturer or hearing health professional may help you find
this rating. Higher ratings mean that the hearing device is
relatively immune to interference noise. The hearing aid and
wireless mobile device rating values are then added together.
A sum of 5 is considered acceptable for normal use. A sum of 6
is considered for best use. If a hearing aid meets the M2 level
rating and the wireless mobile device meets the M3 level rating,
the sum of the two values equal M5. This is synonymous for T
ratings. This should provide the hearing aid user with “normal
usage” while using their hearing aid with the particular wireless
mobile device.
Health and Safety Information
228
“Normal usage” in this context is defined as a signal quality that
is acceptable for normal operation. The M mark is intended to be
synonymous with the U mark. The T mark is intended to be
synonymous with the UT mark. The M and T marks are
recommended by the Alliance for Telecommunications Industries
Solutions (ATIS). The U and UT marks are referenced in Section
20.19 of the FCC Rules.
The HAC rating and measurement procedure are described in the
American National Standards Institute (ANSI) C63.19 standard.
HAC/Wi-Fi for Newer Technologies
This phone has been tested and rated for use with hearing aids
for some of the wireless technologies that it uses. However, there
may be some newer wireless technologies used in this phone
that have not been tested yet for use with hearing aids. It is
important to try the different features of this phone thoroughly
and in different locations, using your hearing aid or cochlear
implant, to determine if you hear any interfering noise. Consult
your service provider or the manufacturer of this phone for
information on hearing aid compatibility. If you have questions
about return or exchange policies, consult your service provider
or phone retailer.
229
M3
+
M2
=
5
T3
+
T2
=
5
Restricting Children's Access to Your
Mobile Device
Your mobile device is not a toy. Do not allow children to play with
it because they could hurt themselves and others, damage the
mobile device, or make calls that increase your mobile device
bill.
Keep the mobile device and all its parts and accessories out of
the reach of small children.
FCC Notice and Cautions
FCC Notice
The mobile device may cause TV or radio interference if used in
close proximity to receiving equipment. The FCC can require you
to stop using the mobile device if such interference cannot be
eliminated. Vehicles using liquefied petroleum gas (such as
propane or butane) must comply with the National Fire Protection
Standard (NFPA-58). For a copy of this standard, contact the
National Fire Protection Association.
Cautions
Any changes or modifications to your mobile device not expressly
approved in this document could void your warranty for this
equipment and void your authority to operate this equipment.
Only use approved batteries, antennas, and chargers. The use of
any unauthorized accessories may be dangerous and void the
mobile device warranty if said accessories cause damage or a
defect to the mobile device. Although your mobile device is quite
sturdy, it is a complex piece of equipment and can be broken.
Avoid dropping, hitting, bending, or sitting on it.
Other Important Safety Information
• Only qualified personnel should service the mobile device or install the
mobile device in a vehicle. Faulty installation or service may be
dangerous and may invalidate any warranty applicable to the device.
• Ensure that any mobile devices or related equipment installed in your
vehicle are securely mounted.
• Check regularly that all wireless mobile device equipment in your
vehicle is mounted and operating properly.
• Do not store or carry flammable liquids, gases, or explosive materials
in the same compartment as the mobile device, its parts, or
accessories.
• For vehicles equipped with an air bag, remember that an air bag
inflates with great force. Do not place objects, including installed or
portable wireless equipment near or in the area over the air bag or in
the air bag deployment area. If wireless equipment is improperly
installed and the air bag inflates, serious injury could result.
• Switch your mobile device off before boarding an aircraft. The use of
wireless mobile devices in aircraft is illegal and may be dangerous to
the aircraft's operation. Check with appropriate authorities before
using any function of a mobile device while on an aircraft.
• Failure to observe these instructions may lead to the suspension or
denial of cell phone services to the offender, or legal action, or both.
Health and Safety Information
230
• If the phone, battery, charger or any accessory is not working properly,
take it to your nearest qualified service facility. The personnel there
will assist you, and if necessary, arrange for service.
• Dispose of phones in accordance with local regulations. In some areas,
the disposal of phones in household or business trash may be
prohibited. For safe disposal options for phones, contact your nearest
Samsung authorized service center.
231
Section 14: Warranty Information
Standard Limited Warranty
What is Covered and For How Long?
SAMSUNG TELECOMMUNICATIONS AMERICA, LLC ("SAMSUNG")
warrants that SAMSUNG's handsets and accessories
("Products") are free from defects in material and workmanship
under normal use and service for the period commencing upon
the date of purchase by the first consumer purchaser and
continuing for the following specified period of time after that
date:
Phone
1 Year
Batteries
1 Year
Case/Pouch/Holster
90 Days
Other Phone Accessories
1 Year
What is Not Covered?
This Limited Warranty is conditioned upon proper use of the Product.
This Limited Warranty does not cover: (a) defects or damage resulting
from accident, misuse, abnormal use, abnormal conditions, improper
storage, exposure to liquid, moisture, dampness, sand or dirt, neglect, or
unusual physical, electrical or electromechanical stress; (b) scratches,
dents and cosmetic damage, unless caused by SAMSUNG; (c) defects or
damage resulting from excessive force or use of a metallic object when
pressing on a touch screen; (d) equipment that has the serial number or
the enhancement data code removed, defaced, damaged, altered or
made illegible; (e) ordinary wear and tear; (f) defects or damage
resulting from the use of Product in conjunction or connection with
accessories, products, or ancillary/peripheral equipment not furnished or
approved by SAMSUNG; (g) defects or damage resulting from improper
testing, operation, maintenance, installation, service, or adjustment not
furnished or approved by SAMSUNG; (h) defects or damage resulting
from external causes such as collision with an object, fire, flooding, dirt,
windstorm, lightning, earthquake, exposure to weather conditions, theft,
blown fuse, or improper use of any electrical source; (i) defects or
damage resulting from cellular signal reception or transmission, or
viruses or other software problems introduced into the Product; or (j)
Product used or purchased outside the United States. This Limited
Warranty covers batteries only if battery capacity falls below 80% of
rated capacity or the battery leaks, and this Limited Warranty does not
cover any battery if (i) the battery has been charged by a battery charger
not specified or approved by SAMSUNG for charging the battery; (ii) any
of the seals on the battery are broken or show evidence of tampering; or
(iii) the battery has been used in equipment other than the SAMSUNG
phone for which it is specified.
Warranty Information
232
What are SAMSUNG's Obligations?
During the applicable warranty period, provided the Product is
returned in accordance with the terms of this Limited Warranty,
SAMSUNG will repair or replace the Product, at SAMSUNG'S sole
option, without charge. SAMSUNG may, at SAMSUNG's sole
option, use rebuilt, reconditioned, or new parts or components
when repairing any Product, or may replace the Product with a
rebuilt, reconditioned or new Product. Repaired/replaced cases,
pouches and holsters will be warranted for a period of ninety (90)
days. All other repaired/replaced Products will be warranted for
a period equal to the remainder of the original Limited Warranty
on the original Product or for ninety (90) days, whichever is
longer. All replaced Products, parts, components, boards and
equipment shall become the property of SAMSUNG. Except to
any extent expressly allowed by applicable law, transfer or
assignment of this Limited Warranty is prohibited.
What must you do to obtain warranty service?
To obtain service under this Limited Warranty, you must return
the Product to an authorized phone service facility in an adequate
container for shipping, accompanied by the sales receipt or
comparable proof of sale showing the original date of purchase,
the serial number of the Product and the seller's name and
address. To obtain assistance on where to deliver the Product,
please call SAMSUNG Customer Care at 1-888-987-4357. If
233
SAMSUNG determines that any Product is not covered by this
Limited Warranty, you must pay all parts, shipping, and labor
charges for the repair or return of such Product.
You should keep a separate backup copy of any contents of the
Product before delivering the Product to SAMSUNG for warranty
service.
What Are The Limits On SAMSUNG’s liability?
THIS LIMITED WARRANTY SETS OUT THE FULL EXTENT OF SAMSUNG'S
RESPONSIBILITIES, AND THE EXCLUSIVE REMEDY REGARDING THE
PRODUCTS. ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING WITHOUT
LIMITATION, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THIS
LIMITED WARRANTY. IN NO EVENT SHALL SAMSUNG BE LIABLE FOR
DAMAGES IN EXCESS OF THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE PRODUCT OR
FOR, WITHOUT LIMITATION, COMMERCIAL LOSS OF ANY SORT; LOSS OF
USE, TIME, DATA, REPUTATION, OPPORTUNITY, GOODWILL, PROFITS OR
SAVINGS; INCONVENIENCE; INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL OR
PUNITIVE DAMAGES; OR DAMAGES ARISING FROM THE USE OR
INABILITY TO USE THE PRODUCT. SOME STATES AND JURISDICTIONS
DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY
LASTS, OR THE DISCLAIMER OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS AND
DISCLAIMERS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
SAMSUNG MAKES NO WARRANTIES OR REPRESENTATIONS, EXPRESS
OR IMPLIED, STATUTORY OR OTHERWISE, AS TO THE QUALITY,
CAPABILITIES, OPERATIONS, PERFORMANCE OR SUITABILITY OF ANY
THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE OR EQUIPMENT USED IN CONJUNCTION WITH
THE PRODUCT, OR THE ABILITY TO INTEGRATE ANY SUCH SOFTWARE OR
EQUIPMENT WITH THE PRODUCT, WHETHER SUCH THIRD-PARTY
SOFTWARE OR EQUIPMENT IS INCLUDED WITH THE PRODUCT
DISTRIBUTED BY SAMSUNG OR OTHERWISE. RESPONSIBILITY FOR THE
QUALITY, CAPABILITIES, OPERATIONS, PERFORMANCE AND SUITABILITY
OF ANY SUCH THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE OR EQUIPMENT RESTS SOLELY
WITH THE USER AND THE DIRECT VENDOR, OWNER OR SUPPLIER OF
SUCH THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE OR EQUIPMENT.
Nothing in the Product instructions or information shall be construed to
create an express warranty of any kind with respect to the Products. No
agent, employee, dealer, representative or reseller is authorized to
modify or extend this Limited Warranty or to make binding
representations or claims, whether in advertising, presentations or
otherwise, on behalf of SAMSUNG regarding the Products or this Limited
Warranty.
This Limited Warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also
have other rights that vary from state to state.
What is the procedure for resolving disputes?
ALL DISPUTES WITH SAMSUNG ARISING IN ANY WAY FROM THIS
LIMITED WARRANTY OR THE SALE, CONDITION OR
PERFORMANCE OF THE PRODUCTS SHALL BE RESOLVED
EXCLUSIVELY THROUGH FINAL AND BINDING ARBITRATION, AND
NOT BY A COURT OR JURY. Any such dispute shall not be
combined or consolidated with a dispute involving any other
person's or entity's Product or claim, and specifically, without
limitation of the foregoing, shall not under any circumstances
proceed as part of a class action. The arbitration shall be
conducted before a single arbitrator, whose award may not
exceed, in form or amount, the relief allowed by the applicable
law. The arbitration shall be conducted according to the
American Arbitration Association (AAA) Commercial Arbitration
Rules applicable to consumer disputes. This arbitration provision
is entered pursuant to the Federal Arbitration Act. The laws of
the State of Texas, without reference to its choice of laws
principles, shall govern the interpretation of the Limited Warranty
and all disputes that are subject to this arbitration provision. The
arbitrator shall decide all issues of interpretation and application
of this arbitration provision and the Limited Warranty.
For any arbitration in which your total damage claims, exclusive
of attorney fees and expert witness fees, are $5,000.00 or less
("Small Claim"), the arbitrator may, if you prevail, award your
reasonable attorney fees, expert witness fees and costs as part
Warranty Information
234
of any award, but may not grant SAMSUNG its attorney fees,
expert witness fees or costs unless it is determined that the claim
was brought in bad faith. In a Small Claim case, you shall be
required to pay no more than half of the total administrative,
facility and arbitrator fees, or $50.00 of such fees, whichever is
less, and SAMSUNG shall pay the remainder of such fees.
Administrative, facility and arbitrator fees for arbitrations in
which your total damage claims, exclusive of attorney fees and
expert witness fees, exceed $5,000.00 ("Large Claim") shall be
determined according to AAA rules. In a Large Claim case, the
arbitrator may grant to the prevailing party, or apportion among
the parties, reasonable attorney fees, expert witness fees and
costs. Judgment may be entered on the arbitrator's award in any
court of competent jurisdiction.
number; and (d) the IMEI or MEID or Serial Number, as applicable, if
you have it (the IMEI or MEID or Serial Number can be found (i) on
the Product box; (ii) on the Product information screen, which can
be found under "Settings;" (iii) on a label on the back of the
Product beneath the battery, if the battery is removable; and (iv) on
the outside of the Product if the battery is not removable).
Alternatively, you may opt out by calling 1-888-987-4357 no later
than 30 calendar days from the date of the first consumer
purchaser's purchase of the Product and providing the same
information. These are the only two forms of notice that will be
effective to opt out of this dispute resolution procedure. Opting out
of this dispute resolution procedure will not affect the coverage of
the Limited Warranty in any way, and you will continue to enjoy the
benefits of the Limited Warranty.
This arbitration provision also applies to claims against
SAMSUNG'S employees, representatives and affiliates if any
such claim arises from the Product's sale, condition or
performance.
Severability
You may opt out of this dispute resolution procedure by providing
notice to SAMSUNG no later than 30 calendar days from the date of
the first consumer purchaser's purchase of the Product. To opt out,
you must send notice by e-mail to [email protected], with
the subject line: "Arbitration Opt Out." You must include in the opt
out e-mail (a) your name and address; (b) the date on which the
Product was purchased; (c) the Product model name or model
Samsung Telecommunications America, LLC
1301 E. Lookout Drive
Richardson, Texas 75082
Phone: 1-800-SAMSUNG
Phone: 1-888-987-HELP (4357)
235
If any portion of this Limited Warranty is held to be illegal or
unenforceable, such partial illegality or unenforceability shall not
affect the enforceability of the remainder of the Limited Warranty.
©2011 Samsung Telecommunications America, LLC. All rights reserved.
No reproduction in whole or in part allowed without prior written
approval. Specifications and availability subject to change without
notice. [060111]
End User License Agreement for Software
IMPORTANT. READ CAREFULLY: This End User License Agreement
("EULA") is a legal agreement between you (either an individual
or a single entity) and Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. for software
owned by Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. and its affiliated
companies and its third party suppliers and licensors that
accompanies this EULA, which includes computer software and
may include associated media, printed materials, "online" or
electronic documentation ("Software"). BY CLICKING THE "I
ACCEPT" BUTTON (OR IF YOU BYPASS OR OTHERWISE DISABLE
THE "I ACCEPT", AND STILL INSTALL, COPY, DOWNLOAD,
ACCESS OR OTHERWISE USE THE SOFTWARE), YOU AGREE TO
BE BOUND BY THE TERMS OF THIS EULA. IF YOU DO NOT
ACCEPT THE TERMS IN THIS EULA, YOU MUST CLICK THE
"DECLINE" BUTTON, DISCONTINUE USE OF THE SOFTWARE.
1. GRANT OF LICENSE. Samsung grants you the following rights
provided that you comply with all terms and conditions of this
EULA: You may install, use, access, display and run one copy of
the Software on the local hard disk(s) or other permanent storage
media of one computer and use the Software on a single
computer or a mobile device at a time, and you may not make
the Software available over a network where it could be used by
multiple computers at the same time. You may make one copy of
the Software in machine-readable form for backup purposes
only; provided that the backup copy must include all copyright or
other proprietary notices contained on the original.
2. RESERVATION OF RIGHTS AND OWNERSHIP. Samsung reserves
all rights not expressly granted to you in this EULA. The Software
is protected by copyright and other intellectual property laws and
treaties. Samsung or its suppliers own the title, copyright and
other intellectual property rights in the Software. The Software is
licensed, not sold.
3. LIMITATIONS ON END USER RIGHTS. You may not reverse
engineer, decompile, disassemble, or otherwise attempt to
discover the source code or algorithms of, the Software (except
and only to the extent that such activity is expressly permitted by
applicable law notwithstanding this limitation), or modify, or
disable any features of, the Software, or create derivative works
based on the Software. You may not rent, lease, lend, sublicense
or provide commercial hosting services with the Software.
4. CONSENT TO USE OF DATA. You agree that Samsung and its
affiliates may collect and use technical information gathered as
part of the product support services related to the Software
provided to you, if any, related to the Software. Samsung may
use this information solely to improve its products or to provide
Warranty Information
236
customized services or technologies to you and will not disclose
this information in a form that personally identifies you.
5. UPGRADES. This EULA applies to updates, supplements and
add-on components (if any) of the Software that Samsung may
provide to you or make available to you after the date you obtain
your initial copy of the Software, unless we provide other terms
along with such upgrade. To use Software identified as an
upgrade, you must first be licensed for the Software identified by
Samsung as eligible for the upgrade. After upgrading, you may
no longer use the Software that formed the basis for your
upgrade eligibility.
6. SOFTWARE TRANSFER. You may not transfer this EULA or the
rights to the Software granted herein to any third party unless it
is in connection with the sale of the mobile device which the
Software accompanied. In such event, the transfer must include
all of the Software (including all component parts, the media and
printed materials, any upgrades, this EULA) and you may not
retain any copies of the Software. The transfer may not be an
indirect transfer, such as a consignment. Prior to the transfer, the
end user receiving the Software must agree to all the EULA
terms.
7. EXPORT RESTRICTIONS. You acknowledge that the Software is
subject to export restrictions of various countries. You agree to
comply with all applicable international and national laws that
237
apply to the Software, including the U.S. Export Administration
Regulations, as well as end user, end use, and destination
restrictions issued by U.S. and other governments.
8. TERMINATION. This EULA is effective until terminated. Your
rights under this License will terminate automatically without
notice from Samsung if you fail to comply with any of the terms
and conditions of this EULA. Upon termination of this EULA, you
shall cease all use of the Software and destroy all copies, full or
partial, of the Software.
9. DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTIES. You expressly acknowledge
and agree that use of the Software is at your sole risk and that
the entire risk as to satisfactory quality, performance, accuracy
and effort is with you. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY
APPLICABLE LAW, THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS" AND
WITH ALL FAULTS AND WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, AND
SAMSUNG AND ITS LICENSORS (COLLECTIVELY REFERRED TO AS
"SAMSUNG" FOR THE PURPOSES OF SECTIONS 9, 10 and 11)
HEREBY DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS WITH
RESPECT TO THE SOFTWARE, EITHER EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR
STATUTORY, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES AND/OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY, OF
SATISFACTORY QUALITY OR WORKMANLIKE EFFORT, OF FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, OF RELIABILITY OR AVAILABILITY,
OF ACCURACY, OF LACK OF VIRUSES, OF QUIET ENJOYMENT,
AND NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. SAMSUNG
DOES NOT WARRANT AGAINST INTERFERENCE WITH YOUR
ENJOYMENT OF THE SOFTWARE, THAT THE FUNCTIONS
CONTAINED IN THE SOFTWARE WILL MEET YOUR
REQUIREMENTS, THAT THE OPERATION OF THE SOFTWARE WILL
BE UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR-FREE, OR THAT DEFECTS IN THE
SOFTWARE WILL BE CORRECTED. NO ORAL OR WRITTEN
INFORMATION OR ADVICE GIVEN BY SAMSUNG OR A SAMSUNG
AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE SHALL CREATE A WARRANTY.
SHOULD THE SOFTWARE PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE
ENTIRE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR
CORRECTION. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE
EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR LIMITATIONS ON
APPLICABLE STATUTORY RIGHTS OF A CONSUMER, SO THESE
EXCLUSIONS AND LIMITATIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
10. EXCLUSION OF INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL AND CERTAIN
OTHER DAMAGES. TO THE EXTENT NOT PROHIBITED BY LAW, IN
NO EVENT SHALL SAMSUNG BE LIABLE FOR PERSONAL INJURY,
OR ANY INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES WHATSOEVER, OR FOR LOSS OF PROFITS, LOSS OF
DATA, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, OR FOR ANY PECUNIARY
DAMAGES OR LOSSES, ARISING OUT OF OR RELATED TO YOUR
USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE SOFTWARE, THE PROVISION OF
OR FAILURE TO PROVIDE SUPPORT OR OTHER SERVICES,
INFORMATION, SOFTWARE, AND RELATED CONTENT THROUGH
THE SOFTWARE OR OTHERWISE ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF
THE SOFTWARE, OR OTHERWISE UNDER OR IN CONNECTION
WITH ANY PROVISION OF THIS EULA, HOWEVER CAUSED,
REGARDLESS OF THE THEORY OF LIABILITY (CONTRACT, TORT
OR OTHERWISE) AND EVEN IF SAMSUNG HAS BEEN ADVISED OF
THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO
NOT ALLOW THE LIMITATION OF LIABILITY FOR PERSONAL
INJURY, OR OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO
THIS LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
11. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY. Notwithstanding any damages that
you might incur for any reason whatsoever (including, without
limitation, all damages referenced herein and all direct or general
damages in contract or anything else), the entire liability of
Samsung under any provision of this EULA and your exclusive
remedy hereunder shall be limited to the greater of the actual
damages you incur in reasonable reliance on the Software up to
the amount actually paid by you for the Software or US$5.00. The
foregoing limitations, exclusions and disclaimers (including
Sections 9, 10 and 11) shall apply to the maximum extent
permitted by applicable law, even if any remedy fails its essential
purpose.
12. U.S. GOVERNMENT END USERS. The Software is licensed
only with "restricted rights" and as "commercial items"
consisting of "commercial software" and "commercial software
documentation" with only those rights as are granted to all other
end users pursuant to the terms and conditions herein.
Warranty Information
238
13. APPLICABLE LAW. This EULA is governed by the laws of
TEXAS, without regard to conflicts of laws principles. This EULA
shall not be governed by the UN Convention on Contracts for the
International Sale of Goods, the application of which is expressly
excluded. If a dispute, controversy or difference is not amicably
settled, it shall be finally resolved by arbitration in Seoul, Korea in
accordance with the Arbitration Rules of the Korean Commercial
Arbitration Board. The award of arbitration shall be final and
binding upon the parties.
14. ENTIRE AGREEMENT; SEVERABILITY. This EULA is the entire
agreement between you and Samsung relating to the Software
and supersedes all prior or contemporaneous oral or written
communications, proposals and representations with respect to
the Software or any other subject matter covered by this EULA. If
any provision of this EULA is held to be void, invalid,
unenforceable or illegal, the other provisions shall continue in full
force and effect.
Precautions for Transfer and Disposal
If data stored on this device is deleted or reformatted using the
standard methods, the data only appears to be removed on a
superficial level, and it may be possible for someone to retrieve
and reuse the data by means of special software.
To avoid unintended information leaks and other problems of this
sort, it is recommended that the device be returned to Samsung’s
239
Customer Care Center for an Extended File System (EFS) Clear
which will eliminate all user memory and return all settings to
default settings. Please contact the Samsung Customer Care
Center for details.
Important!: Please provide warranty information (proof of purchase) to
Samsung’s Customer Care Center in order to provide this service
at no charge. If the warranty has expired on the device, charges
may apply.
Customer Care Center:
1000 Klein Rd.
Plano, TX 75074
Toll Free Tel: 1.888.987.HELP (4357)
Samsung Telecommunications America, LLC:
1301 East Lookout Drive
Richardson, Texas 75082
Phone: 1-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
Important!: If you are using a handset other than a standard numeric keypad,
dial the numbers listed in brackets.
Phone: 1-888-987-HELP (4357)
©2011 Samsung Telecommunications America. All rights
reserved.
No reproduction in whole or in part allowed without prior written
approval. Specifications and availability subject to change
without notice.
Warranty Information
240
Index
Numerics
2G Network
Using 186
3G Network 186
Using 186
4G 174
4G Network 186
Using 186
A
Accessing
Recently-used applications 36
Voice mail 17
Accounts and syncronization 130
Add 2 sec Pause 56
Add to Home
Shortcuts 130
Add to Slideshow 119
Adjusting
Call volume 62
Adobe PDF 154
Alarm
Setting 177
Alarm Tone
241
Set as 126
AllShare
Configuring Settings 131
Receiving Media 132
Transmitting Media 132
Amazon Kindle 37
Amazon MP3 133
Answering a call 54
Answering Call 187
Application cache and data
Clearing 144
Application Menus
Navigating through 34
Applications 36
Android Market 40 142
Browser 43 157
Calculator 37 134
Calendar 37
Camera 38 136
Downloads 38
Email 38 138
Google Books 37
Google Mail 39 138
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
Google Maps 40 140
Memo 40
memo 145
Messaging 40
messaging 145
TeleNav GPS 42 153
Using the Camcorder 120
Using the Camera 112
Video Player 42 155
Voice Recorder 42 156
Voice Search 43 156
YouTube 43 157
Applications and Development 130
Ask on Connection 201
Auto Redial 188
Auto Reject 187
Auto-sync
Enabling 201
,
,
,
,
,
B
Back up
My Data 203
Backup and Restore 203
Battery
Charging 11
Extending Life 13
Installing 10
Low Battery Indicator 12
Removal 10
Saving Power 13
Wall Charger 11
Battery Cover
Removal 7
Replace 8
Battery Life
Extending 13
Battery Use & Safety 218
Bing
Set Search Engine 164
Block List 68
Bluetooth
About 164
Change Name 165
Deleting a Paired Device 167
Disable 165
Disconnecting a Paired Device 167
Enable 137 165
Paring Devices 166
,
Scan for Devices 166
Sending Contact Information 167
Sending Contacts Via 167
Set Visibility 166
Settings 165
Status indicators 165
Switching to Headset during call 63
Turning on and off 165
Visible Timeout 166
Browser
Adding bookmarks 162
Deleting bookmarks 162
Emptying cookies 162
Entering a URL 160
Navigation 160
Options 160
Search Engine 164
Settings 163
Bubble
Options 101
C
Calendar 176
Creating an event 176
Manually Sync Events 135
Settings 176
,
Calibration 193 194
Call
Ending from Status Bar 53
Call Barring 188
Call Forwarding 188
Call Functions 52
Answering 54
Ending 52
Ending a Call 52
Making a Multi-Party Call 63
Pause Dialing 56
Redialing the last number 57
Wait dialing 57
Call Logs 66
Accessing 66
Accessing from Notifications 67
Altering Numbers 68
Erasing 69
Call Settings 187
General 187
Voice Calls 188
Call Volume
Adjusting 62
Call Waiting 65 188
,
242
Caller Ringtone
Set as 126
Calling
Using Wi-Fi 59
Calls
Making a 52
Multi-party 63
Muting 63
Camcorder 120
Accessing the Video Folder 120
Camcorder Options 120
Options 115
Settings 116
Shooting Video 120
Camera 112
Camera Options 113
Options 113
Taking Pictures 112
Car Home 136
Care and Maintenance 223
Charging battery 11
Children and Cell Phones 214
Clearing
Application cache and data 144
243
Connections
Accessing the Internet 159
Contact
Copying to microSD Card 92
Copying to SIM Card 91
Creating a New 82
Joining 88
New From Keypad 83
Contact Entry
Options 88
Contact Image
Set as 119
Contact List
Options 86
Contact Menus
Options 87
Contacts
Adding a Number to Existing 86
Adding Your Facebook Friends 94
Additional Options 95
Default Storage Location 95
Deleting 86
Display Options 93
Displaying Contacts by Name 93
Filtering 93
First Name First 93
Groups 96
Last Name First 93
Qik 154
Sending 90
Sending All 90
Setting Default Location 87
Settings 95
Contacts List 52
Context Menus 85 87
Navigation 35
Using 35
Cookies
Emptying 162
Copying Contact 91
Corporate Email
Account Syncronization 203
Add Account 203
Creating a Playlist 127
Creating and sending
Messages 98
Customizing
Screens 43
,
D
Data Roaming 185
Deleting
Multiple messages 102
Single message 102
Deleting a contact 86
Desk Home 137
Display
Icons 23
Settings 23
Status Bar 23
Display / Touch-Screen 221
Displaying your phone number 52
Do cell phones pose a health hazard?
211
Downloading
New application 143
Downloads 137
Internet Downloads 137
Other Downloads 137
DriveSmart
Handsfree 137
E
EDGE Network 186
Email 104
Add Signature 106
Composing 105
Configuring Settings 106
Creating an Account 104
Internet Email 104
Opening 105
Opening Internet Email 105
Refreshing Messages 105
Sending 95
Emergency Calls 223
Ending
A call 52
Entering Text 70
Using SWYPE 71
Erasing files from
Memory card 51
Exchange Email 107
Account Setup 107
Composing 108
Configuring Settings 109
Deleting Message 108
Opening 108
Refreshing Messages 108
Exposure to RF Signals 211
F
Facebook 117
Qik 154
Factory Data Reset 51 204
FCC Hearing Aid Compatibility (HAC)
Regulations for Wireless Devices 228
FCC Notice and Cautions 230
FCC Part 15 217
Fixed Dialing Numbers 188
Flight Mode 23
Folder
Creating and Managing 47
Deleting 47
Renaming 47
Font
Style 192
Font Size
Caption 158
,
G
Gallery
Folder Options 117
Image Options 118
Opening 122
Get Friends 93
244
Getting Started 6
Battery 10
Battery Cover 7
Locking/Unlocking the Phone 14
microSD card 9
SIM Card 8
Switching Phone On/Off 14
Voice Mail 16
Gmail 110 138
Composing a message 110
Opening 110
Refreshing 110
Signing In 110
Viewing 111
Google
Account Management Settings 202
Account Syncronization 202
Add Account 202
Adding a Sync Account 202
Create New Account 15
Retrieving Password 16
Set Search Engine 164
Signing into Your Account 16
Sync Books 202
Google Books 134
,
245
Google mail
see also Gmail 110
Google Maps
Enabling a location source 141
Opening a map 141
Google Talk 41 152
GPS & AGPS 222
Groups
Adding an Member to an Existing
Group 96
Creating a new caller group 96
Editing a caller group 96
Removing an Entry 96
Settings 96
GSM 185
,
H
Handsfree 137
Health and Safety Information 211
History tab 97
Hold
Placing a call on hold 62
Home 30
Home Key 27
Home Screen
Overview 30
Home Screen Wallpaper 192
Set as 119
Setting 117
Horizontal Calibration 193 194
HSPA+ 174
,
I
Icons
Description 23
Indicator 23
Status 23
Images
Assigning as a Contact icon 119
Assigning as wallpaper 119
Importing and Exporting
To SIM card 95
In call
Options 61 63
INCEPTION 123 139
Incoming Call Volume
Setting 191
Indicator icons 23
International Call 56
International calls
Making 56
,
,
Internet 159
Search 161
Internet Downloads 137
Internet Email 104
J
Joining
Contact information 88
K
Kies
Prior to Using 169
Kies Mini 169
Kodak 121
L
Lock Screen
Viewing Missed Calls 69
Lock Screen Wallpaper 192
Set as 119
Setting 117
Low battery indicator 12
M
Making
International calls 56
New call 52
Managing Applications 198
Clearing Application Cache 198
Moving Third-party Applications to
Card 199
Uninstalling Third-party Applications
199
Market 142
Marking contact
As a default 90
Mass Storage 201
Media Hub 123
Creating a New Account 124
Using 124
Media Volume
Setting 191
Memo
Options 145
Memory card
Erasing files from the 51
Message
Options 99
Read 100
Reply 101
Threads 101
Message Search 102
Message threads 101
Messaging
Creating and sending 98
Creating and Sending Text
Messages 98
Deleting a message 102
Google Mail 110
Icons on the Status Bar 98
Insert Smiley 100
Options 99
Settings 102
Signing into Google Mail 110
Text Templates 103
Types of Messages 98
Viewing new 100
microSD Card
Insertion 9
Removal 10
Microsoft Exchange 104
Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync 82
Mini Diary
Deleting an entry 146
Options 146
Settings 146
246
Missed Call
Viewing from Lock Screen 69
Mobile AP 174
Activating 174
Connecting 174
Securing 175
Mobile Networks 184
Data Roaming 185
Mobile NetworksUse Packet Data 185
Mobile Web 159
Entering Text in the Mobile Web
Browser 160
Navigating with the Mobile Web 160
Using Bookmarks 161
mounting the SD card 50
Move to USB storage 199
Multi-Party Call 63
Dropping One Participant 65
Private conversation 64
Multi-party call
Setting up 64
Multi-party calls 63
Music Player 125
Adding music 127
Creating a playlist 127
247
Editing a Playlist 128
Options 126
Playing Music 125
Removing music 127
Using Playlists 127
My Profile 94
N
Namecard
Send Via 90
Sending 90
Sending All 90
Navigating
Application Menus 34
Sub-Menus 35
Through Screens 32
Network connection
Adding a new 172
Network Mode
2G Network 186
3G Network 186
New applications
Downloading 143
News and Weather 151
Notification Bar 26
Using 26
Notification Volume
Setting 191
O
On/off switch 14
Operating Environment 226
Organizer
Calculator 134
World Clock 178
Other Downloads 137
Other Important Safety Information 230
Outlook 104
Synchronizing 203
Overview
Home Screen 30
P
Pause Dialing 56
Phone
Icons 23
Switching on/off 14
Phone number
Finding 52
Phone Options 191
Phone Ringtone 191
Set as 126
Photos
Options 117
Setting As 117
Sharing 117
Pico TTS 209
Power Control 13
Power Saving Mode 193
Predictive text
Using XT9 79
Prefix Dialing 54
Adding Prefix 55
Deleting 55
Primary Shortcuts 31
Adding and Deleting 44
Q
Qik 154
Recording Video 155
Settings 154
QWERTY
Changing the Input Type 77
R
Recently-used Applications
Accessing 36
Redialing the last number 57
Reducing Exposure
Hands-Free Kits and Other
Accessories 214
Reject Call
With Message 188
Reject List 68
Reset 204
Responsible Listening 224
Restore 203
Restricting Children's Access to Your
Mobile device 229
Ringtone
Phone 191
S
Samsung Keyboard
Settings 206
XT9 Advanced Settings 207
Samsung Kies 201
Samsung Products and Recycling 220
SAR Certification Information 215
Save a Number
From Keypad 83
Screen
Customization 43
Home 30
Navigation 32
Screen Lock 195
Screen Rotation
Auto-Rotate 192
Screen Timeout 193
Screens
Adding and Deleting 44
Rearranging 44
SD card
mounting the 50
Unmounting 50
Search Engine 164
Select Locale 205
Sending a Namecard 90
Setting an alarm 177
Setting up
Voicemail 16
Settings 180
Browser 163
Contact list 95
Display 23
Enabling the GPS Satellites 194
Enabling the sensor aiding 194
Enabling wireless network locations
194
248
Messaging 102
Mini Diary 146
Shortcuts
Adding from Application Screen 45
Adding from Home Screen 46
Deleting from a Screen 46
Managing 45
Primary 31
SIM Card
Changing Exisitng PIN 197
Importing and Exporting 95
Insertion 8
Lock 196
Removal 9
SIM Card Lock
Setting Up 196
Smart Practices While Driving 217
Snapfish 121
Song
Set as 126
Speakerphone
Turning on and off 62
Speed Dial
Changing an entry 58
Making a call 59
249
Removing an entry 58
Setting up entries 58
Standard Limited Warranty 232
Status Bar 23
Sub-Menus
Navigation 35
Switching to a Bluetooth
During a call 63
Swype
Advanced Settings 71 206
Entering text using 71
Help 206
Selecting a Text Input 72
Settings 71 205
Text Entry Tips 72
Tutorial 206
Swype Keyboard
Using 71
Sync Books 202
System Volume
Setting 191
,
,
,
T
Tethering 173 183
Activating 173 183
Active Icon 173 183
Disconnecting 173 183
Text Input
Methods 70
Text Input Method
Selecting 70
Text Templates 103
Create Your Own 104
Text-to-speech
Configuration 208
Third-Party Applications 199
Uninstalling 144
Time Management
Calendar 176
T-Mobile Contacts Backup 82
Tools
Camera 112
Transferring Music Files 128
TTY Mode 190
TV Out 193
Connecting your Phone to TV 193
,
,
,
Twitter
Qik 154
U
UL Certified Travel Charger 221
Understanding Your Phone 19
Back View 22
Display 22
Features 19
Front View 20
Home 30
Uninstalling
Third-party applications 144
Unmounting
SD card 50
Updates tab 97
USB Connection
Turn Off 50
Turn On 50
USB Connections
As mass storage device 168
USB Debugging
Enabling 170
USB Settings
As mass storage device 168
Windows Meida Player 170
USB Tethering
Drivers 169
Use GPS Satellites 141 194
Use Packet Data 185
Use Sensor Aiding 141 194
Use Wireless Networks 141 194
Using Favorites
Adding Favorites 162
Deleting a Favorite 162
Editing Favorites 162
,
,
,
V
Vibrate 191
Vibration
Intensity 192
Setup 191
Video Chat 154
Settings 154
Video Player 117
Videos
Options 117
Visible Timeout 166
Voice Actions 29
Voice dialer
Using 55
Voice Input Recognition 208
Voice mail
Accessing 17
Accessing from another phone 17
Setting up 16
Volume Settings
Adjusting 191
VPN
Adding 183
Settings 183
W
Wait 57
Wait dialing 57
Wallpapers
Changing 48
Managing 48
Warranty Information 232
WCDMA 185
Web 159
History 163
Web applications
enable downloading 168
Widgets
Adding and Removing 46
Google Talk 41
Mini Diary 40
250
Moving to a Different Screen 47
My Account 40
Settings 41 152
Stopwatch 178
Wi-Fi
About 171
Activating 59 171
Advanced settings 173
Calling 59
Connecting to 171
Deactivating 172
Manually scan for network 172
Status icons 172
Windows Media Player
Synchronizing with 170
World Clock
DST Settings 178
WPA2 PSK 175
,
,
Y
Yahoo! 164
YouTube
High Qulaity 129
Qik 154
Settings 158
251